Woori Technology RV-5 AV RECEIVER User Manual RV5 Outside Front Cover

Woori Technology Inc AV RECEIVER RV5 Outside Front Cover

USERS MANUAL

RV-5 Receiver User Guide
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS1. Read these instructions.2. Keep these instructions.3. Heed all warnings.4. Follow all instructions.5. Do not use this apparatus near water.6. Clean only with a dry cloth.7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install inaccordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.8. Do not install near any heat sources such asradiators, heat registers, stoves, or otherapparatus (including amplifiers) that produceheat.9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarizedor grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has twoblades with one wider than the other. Agrounding-type plug has two blades and a thirdgrounding prong. The wide blade or the thirdprong are provided for your safety. If the providedplug does not fit into your outlet, consult anelectrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.10. Protect the power cord from being walked on orpinched, particularly at plugs, conveniencereceptacles, and the point where they exit fromthe apparatus.11. Only use attachments/accessories specified bythe manufacturer.12. Use only with the cart, stand,tripod, bracket or table specifiedby the manufacturer, or sold withthe apparatus. When a cart isused, use caution when movingthe cart/apparatus combination to avoid injuryfrom tip-over.13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms orwhen unused for long periods of time.14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.Servicing is required when the apparatus hasbeen damaged in any way, such as when a powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has beenspilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,the apparatus has been exposed to rain ormoisture, does not operate normally, or has beendropped.15. Do not expose this apparatus to dripping orsplashing and ensure that no objects filled withliquids, such as vases, are placed on theapparatus.16. To completely disconnect this apparatus from theAC Mains, disconnect the power supply cordplug from the AC receptacle.17. The MAINS cord is intended to be the safetydisconnect device for this apparatus and shallremain readily operable at all times.18. Do not expose batteries to excessive heat, suchas sunshine, fire, or the like.19. This product shall be connected to a MAINSsocket outlet with a protective earthingconnection.This equipment has been tested and found tocomply with the limits for a Class B digital device,pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protection againstharmful interference in a residential installation.This equipment generates, uses, and radiates radiofrequency energy and, if not installed and used inaccordance with the instructions, may causeharmful interference to radio or televisionreception, which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on. The user is encouraged to tryto correct the interference by one or more of thefollowing measures:• Re-orient or relocate the receiving antenna.• Increase the separation between the equipment andthe receiver.• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuitdifferent from that to which the receiver isconnected.• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.CautionChanges or modifications not expressly approvedby the party responsible for compliance could voidthe user's authority to operate the equipment.CanadaThis Class B digital apparatus complies withCanadian ICES-003.Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conformeà la norme NMB-003 du Canada.To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock,do not expose this apparatus to rain ormoisture. WARNING The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to thepresence of important operating andmaintenance (servicing) instructions in theliterature accompanying the product.within an equilateral triangle, is intended toalert the user to the presence of uninsulated“dangerous voltage” within the product’senclosure that may be of sufficient magnitudeto constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
Lexicon Inc.3 Oak ParkBedford, MA 01730-1413 USATel 781-280-0300Fax 781-280-0490www.harmanspecialtygroup.comCustomer ServiceTelephone: 781-280-0300Sales Fax: 781-280-0495Service Fax: 781-280-0499Part No. 070-18144 | Rev 0 |   1/07Lexicon, Logic 7, and the L7 logo are registered trademarks of Harman International Industries, Inc. DLP and Texas Instruments are trademarks of Texas Instruments.Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.DTS, DTS-ES, DTS Surround, and Neo:6 are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. and DTS 96/24 is a trademark ofDigital Theater Systems, Inc.Faroudja and DCDi by Faroudja are trademarks of Genesis Microchip, Inc.HD-DVD is a trademark of the DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation (DVD FLLC).HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.SACD is a trademark of Sony Electronics, Inc.SHARC is a registered trademark of Analog Devices, Inc.Other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated.© 2007 Harman International Industries, Incorporated. All rights reserved.This document should not be construed as a commitment on the part of Harman Specialty Group. The information it contains issubject to change without notice. Harman Specialty Group assumes no responsibility for errors that may appear within thisdocument.
Introduction LexiconiiDOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONSThis document contains general safety, installation and operation instructions for the RV-8 Receiver. It is important to read this user guide beforeattempting to use the product. Pay particular attention to safety instructions.The following symbols are used in the document:Appears on the component to indicate the pres-ence of uninsulated, dangerous voltage insidethe enclosure – voltage that may be sufficient toconstitute a risk of shock.Appears on the component to indicate impor-tant operating and maintenance instructions inthe accompanying literature.Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condi-tion or the like that, if not correctly performedor adhered to, could result in injury or death.Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condi-tion or the like that, if not correctly performedor adhered to, could result in damage ordestruction to part or all of the product.Calls attention to information that is essential tohighlight.Represents a menu path. The menu items in gray boxes must beselected with the remote control Menu  arrow to access themenu or menu item in the black box. For example, the SETUP,INPUTS, and DVD1 menu items must be selected to open theDVD1 INPUT SETUP menu.The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is used here as an example and willcontinue to be used as an example throughout this document.Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu may be substi-tuted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in amenu path, any other input may be substituted.WARNINGCAUTION!Note:DVD1INPUTSSETUP NAME EDIT INPUT NAMEThis document uses the term DTS(-ES) to indicate that DTS-ES encoding may or may not be present in the input source.
1Getting StartedAbout the RV-8........................................................................... 1-2Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Product Registration................................................................... 1-5Installation Considerations.......................................................... 1-5Remote Control Battery Installation ............................................ 1-6
Getting Started Lexicon1-2ABOUT THE RV-5Thank you for purchasing the RV-5 Receiver, an 8-channel audioand video control center with independent zone monitoring thatprovides control of audio and video source selection in three zonesat the same time. The RV-5 includes eight configurable inputs, eachof which can be assigned to its built-in tuner, eight digital audio,eight analog audio, phono, five composite video, five S-Video orthree component video input connectors. The analog connectorscan be configured for up to two 5.1-channel sources. The RV-5 features an integrated 7-channel power amplifier that isdesigned to achieve high levels of power and performance.Equipped with a toroidal power transformer, the amplifier alsoprovides thermal and DC protection.The RV-5 AM/FM stereo radio tuner features four tuning regions,allows for the automatic or manual storing of up to 40 presetstations, can receive elements of the Radio Data System (RDS)broadcasts, and is fully configurable for ease of operation. The RV-5also includes a phono input.Inside and out, the RV-5 is designed for possible future develop-ments. The rear panel houses one RS-232 connector capable ofperforming configuration downloads and flash memory softwareupgrades, and another capable of supporting future developments.The rear panel also includes one removable access panel to accom-modate connectors for emerging technologies.More than just an audio and video control center, the RV-5 featuresthe latest version of Lexicon’s critically acclaimed Logic 7®decoding, which creates 7.1-channel output from stereo, and5.1-and 6.1-channel sources. Unlike other decoders, Logic 7 iscompatible with all input sources and requires no special encoding.Because the improvement it provides is clearly audible, Logic 7decoding is widely regarded as the finest available. A Logic7-encoded downmix of multichannel source material is availablewhen using the Headphone listening mode. If a stereo source ispresent, the HEADPHONE L7 listening mode processes it usingLOGIC7, then uses Head Related Transfer Functions to create aheadphone output that introduces a subtle sense of surroundsound, while preserving the original stereo image.In addition to Logic 7, the RV-5 offers Dolby Digital Surround EX,Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Pro Logic, DTS 96/24, DTS neo:6, andDTS-ES. The RV-5 is one of the most advanced audio and video controlcenters available. High-precision 24-bit/96kHz A/D converters canbe used to convert stereo analog audio input signals to digitalsignals, allowing the RV-5 to provide the benefits of precise digitalsignal processing without sacrificing signal integrity. 24-bit/192kHZD/A converters are available for all output channels. Alternatively,5.1-channel and stereo analog signals can bypass A/D conversionand internal processing, following a pure signal path directly to theoutput connectors.Digital audio input signals are processed through a two-stage phaselock loop for extremely low intrinsic jitter and high rejection.Lexicon’s proprietary auto azimuth technology corrects timing andlevel imbalances in stereo sources, ensuring exceptionally accurateplayback of surround-encoded sources. A digital audio pass-through output is available for recording digital signals with a CDrecorder or a similar component.Complementing its audio performance, the RV-5 featuresbroadcast-quality video switchers. An ultrawide-bandwidthcomponent video switcher accepts analog component or RGBvideo signals, while a composite and S-Video switcher accepts high-
RV-5 Getting Started1-3quality NTSC, PAL or SECAM video signals. Composite and S-Videosources can be converted to 480i NTSC (576i PAL) componentvideo. The component video switcher can pass high-definition TV(HDTV) signals and standard-definition (SD) TV signals. Bothswitchers are designed to pass video signals without alteration ordegradation.Built to professional standards, the RV-5 is designed to serve as thecontrol center in any high-quality home theater. Even the mostdemanding enthusiast will be impressed with its unique combi-nation of power, performance, flexibility and technologicalsophistication. With extensive expansion capabilities, the RV-5represents a solid investment that will retain its value in the face ofrapidly emerging technologies.Based on the decoding platform of the Lexicon processor line, theRV-8 Receiver is an exceptional addition to any home theatersystem.  AM/FM tuner, powerful amplifier, three independentzones, impressive digital processor – the RV-8 is truly two separateproducts seamlessly integrated into an incredibly flexible, high-performance, and sophisticated amplifier/processor system.The RV-8 has enough raw power available to drive a 7-channelsystem with room to spare thanks to a prodigious 140 watts perchannel.  Even more impressive, it is capable of driving, difficultspeaker loads while retaining exceptional transparency, widedynamic range, and sonic neutrality.  Flexibility is a necessity in today’s home theater and the RV-8delivers.  The RV-8  can process all major formats from Dolby andDTS, and features THX Ultra2 enhancements.  These formats areprogrammed into the RV-8 software as selectable preferred listeningmodes.  The listener can also program the RV-8 to a specificlistening mode by the input source selected, making favoritesettings simple and automatic. The AM/FM tuner also features theRadio Data Systems (RDS) information, where available.The RV-8 features Lexicon’s LOGIC 7 decoding. This technology isbased on decades of scientific research into how we hear and thestudy of room acoustics. Lexicon Logic 7 processing intelligentlyderives up to 7 channels from any 2-channel, 5.1-channel, or 6.1-channel input source.  LIVE, a unique system that transforms anylistening room into an ideal acoustic space, is also utilized in the RV-8 receiver.  The RV-8 also features Bass Enhancement, another Lexicon propri-etary technology developed specifically for surround systems.During a live musical performance, bass envelops the listener;however, when listening to the same performance from recordedmedia in your home theater, the bass has more of an “in your head”quality, instead of surrounding you.  This phenomenon results fromlow frequency sound waves and their interaction with the naturalacoustics of the room.  The Lexicon Bass Enhancement system isdesigned to reproduce the sense of bass envelopment that existsduring live performances.Highly flexible, the RV-8 has three separate audio zones.  Since allthree zones are wholly independent, it’s possible to watch a DVD inthe home theater while listening to a CD in the office and watchingsatellite TV in the kitchen.  These additional zones can be controlledby IR or RS-232 based control systems.With enormous flexibility, a powerful amplifier, superior processing,and phenomenal sound quality, the RV-8 is truly in a class of its ownand would make a fine addition to any home theater.  Contact yourlocal authorized Lexicon dealer to transform your listeningexperience today.
Getting Started Lexicon1-4HIGHLIGHTS• Eight channels• Eight configurable inputs• Three independent zones• Integrated 7-channel amplifier with thermal and DC protection and toroidal power transformer•Compatible with 2Ω speaker impedances• AM/FM stereo radio tuner•RDS• Phono input with 2-channel analog bypass path• Up to two 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors• Analog bypass option for 5.1 analog stereo audio input connectors• Auto switching between digital and analog audio input connectors• Headphone output with LOGIC7 processing• Two 32-bit DSP engines for custom processing• Separate DSP engine for decoding compressed audio sources• Four S/PDIF coaxial and four S/PDIF optical (Toslink) digital audio input connectors• One S/PDIF coaxial and one S/PDIF optical (Toslink) digital audio output connectors• 24-Bit/192kHz D/A converters for all audio channels• Two sets of analog A/V Zone 2 outputs; one fixed, one variable• Broadcast-quality video switching• Video up conversion from S-video/composite to component video• Automatic and manual calibration of speaker distances and output levels• Three component video input connectors with full HDTV compatibility• Five composite video input connectors•Five S-Video input connectors• One component video output• Logic 7 decoding• Two 32-bit DSP engines•• Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, and Dolby Pro Logic decoding• DTS 96/24, DTS NEO:6, and DTS-ES (discrete and matrix) decoding• RS-232 control• Two trigger output connectors• Rear-panel IR input connector• Two microphone input connectors• Two internal expansion slots• Removable access panel• Flash memory software upgrade capabilities• Optional 19-inch rack-mount kit• IR preprogrammed/learning remote control with LCD display• Maximum volume level
RV-5 Getting Started1-5PRODUCT REGISTRATIONPlease register the RV-5 Receiver within 15 days of purchase.Register online at www.lexicon.com or complete and return theproduct registration card attached to the back cover of this userguide. Retain the sales receipt as proof of warranty coverage.INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONSThe RV-5 requires special care during installation to ensure optimalperformance. Pay particular attention to instructions below and toother precautions that appear throughout this user guide.DO install the RV-5 on a solid, flat, level surface such as a table orshelf. The RV-5 can also be installed in a standard 19-inchequipment rack using an optional rack-mount kit available from anauthorized Lexicon dealer.DO select a dry, well-ventilated location out of direct sunlight.DO NOT expose the RV-5 to high temperatures, humidity, steam,smoke, dampness or excessive dust. Avoid installing the RV-5 nearradiators or stacking the RV-5 over other heat-producingequipment such as a power amplifier.DO NOT install the RV-5 near unshielded TV or FM antennas, cableTV decoders, or other RF-emitting devices that might causeinterference.DO NOT place the RV-5 on a thick rug or carpet, or cover the RV-8with a cloth, as this might prevent proper cooling.DO NOT place the RV-5 on a windowsill or any location exposed todirect sunlight.DO NOT obstruct the front-panel IR receiver window. The remotecontrol must be in line of sight with the IR receiver for properoperation. DO NOT install the RV-5 on a surface that is unstable or unable tosupport all four feet.CAUTION! Before moving the RV-5, power the unit off using the rear-panel power switch and unplug the power cord from thewall outlet.
Getting Started Lexicon1-6REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY INSTALLATIONThe remote control requires four AAA batteries. The batteries should be replaced as needed. Alkaline batteries, which last longer withoutleaking, are recommended. When battery power is low, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition, preventing it from operating theRV-5. When this occurs, replace the batteries. Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed.To replace the remote control batteries:1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote control. Press the tab (1) and lift the cover (2) away from the remote control. 2. Remove old batteries (if applicable).3. Observing the proper polarity, insert four AAA batteries (3).4. Align the cover over the battery compartment and gently press down until it snaps back into place (4).5. Dispose of the old batteries (if applicable).1234
2Basic OperationFront-Panel Overview ................................................................. 2-2Rear-Panel Overview................................................................... 2-6Tuner Overview ........................................................................ 2-10Selecting a Station...................................................................................2-10Direct Station Access ...............................................................................2-10Tune/Seek Access ....................................................................................2-10Scan Mode ..............................................................................................2-11Loading Presets .......................................................................................2-11Saving Presets..........................................................................................2-11Editing Presets .........................................................................................2-12Autoload .................................................................................................2-12Amplifier Overview ................................................................... 2-12Amplifier Channel Status .........................................................................2-13Making Connections With the Amplifier Output ......................................2-13Headphone Overview ............................................................... 2-13Remote Control Overview......................................................... 2-14Operation Considerations........................................................................2-14MAIN Menu ............................................................................................2-14Menu Navigation ....................................................................................2-14Menu Item Selection ...............................................................................2-15Remote Control Buttons ..........................................................................2-17Command Matrix....................................................................................2-18Understanding the Zones ......................................................... 2-28Two-Line Status ........................................................................ 2-28STATUS Menus ......................................................................... 2-29STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions.....................................................2-34STATUS Menu Level Meters ...................................................... 2-35
Basic Operation Lexicon2-2FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEWThe RV-5 is shown below. The numbers in the front-panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text.1. Front Panel Display2. IR Receiver3. Volume Knob4. Tuner5. Main Zone Input Selection Buttons6. Zone 2 Input Selection Buttons7. Zone 2 Off Button8. Main Zone Off Button9. Mute Button10. Mode  and  Buttons11. Standby Button8712345610 911
RV-5 Basic Operation2-31  FRONT-PANEL DISPLAYUse the front-panel display to view the current input, listeningmode, input source and volume level. If the built-in tuner is active,the display will show the frequency, band, listening mode andvolume level. The 2 x 20 character display also functions as a displayfor messages and menus, one line at a time.Note:Power is still supplied to the RV-5 when standby mode is activated.2  IR RECEIVERThe IR receiver receives infrared commands from the RV-5 remotecontrol. There are three associated LEDs. • The amber LED blinks when a remote control command isreceived. • The red LED lights when the A/D converters are overloading.• The blue LED lights when the RV-5 is powered on and activated– even if the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter isset to ALWAYS OFF.3  VOLUME KNOBUse the volume knob to adjust volume level in all Zones.To adjust the Main Zone volume level:Rotate the volume knob clockwise to increaseor counterclockwise to decrease volume levelin 1dB increments. A horizontal bar graphindicating the current Main Zone volume level is displayed in theon-screen and front-panel displays. The Main Zone volume range is–80 to +12dB. To adjust the Zone 2 volume level:1. Press and hold the front-panel Zone 2  input selection button thatcorresponds with the current input source. For instance, if thecurrent input source is using the DVD1 input, press and hold theDVD1 input selection button in the desired zone.2. While holding the desired zone inputselection button, rotate the volume knobclockwise to increase or counterclockwise todecrease volume level in 1dB increments.The corresponding horizontal graphappears in the on-screen and front-paneldisplays, and indicates the position at which the current Zone 2volume level falls within the –80 to +12dB volume range.3. Release the selected Zone 2 input selection button when Zone 2volume level has been set.4  TUNER SELECTION BUTTONSTuner selection buttons allow for direct entry of station frequencies,selection of AM or FM broadcast bands and the saving/recalling ofpresets. See “Tuner Overview” on page 2-9 for additionalinformation.Amber LEDRed LEDBlue LEDVOLUME                -34dbZONE 2 VOLUME                -34dbZONE 3 VOLUME                -34db
Basic Operation Lexicon2-4FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEW (continued)5  MAIN ZONE INPUT SELECTION BUTTONSSelects the corresponding input in the Main Zone. When an input isselected, a blue LED lights on the corresponding input selectionbutton. When the Main Zone is deactivated, pressing a Main Zoneinput selection button activates the corresponding input in theMain Zone. Zone 2 remains deactivated until a Zone 2 input isselected.6  ZONE 2 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONSSelects the corresponding input in Zone 2. When an input isselected, an amber LED lights on the corresponding input selectionbutton. When Zone 2 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 2 inputselection button activates the corresponding input in Zone 2. TheMain Zone remains deactivated until a Main Zone input is selected.7  STANDBY BUTTONToggles the RV-5 between on and standby. When the RV-5 ispowered on, pressing this button places the RV-5 into standby andlights the red LED on the button. Power is supplied to the RV-5when in standby. When the RV-5 is in standby, pressing the buttonturns the unit on and activates all zones that were active in theprevious operating session.In the event of a power outage, the RV-5 will display a BROWNOUT!! PRESS STANDBY message. To turn the unit on, use theSTANDBY button. For more information, see “POWERMANAGEMENT” on page 3-3.8  MODE  and  BUTTONS Use the Mode buttons to scroll to the previous () or next ()available listening mode. Scrolling occurs in the order shown in theMODE ADJUST menu. Refer to “Listening Mode Activation” onpage 6-2 for more information.9  MUTE BUTTONMutes or restores the RV-5 Main Zone volume to its original level. Pressthe Mute button to mute volume level; “MUTE ON” appears in theon-screen and front-panel displays. Press the Mute button again torestore the volume to its original level. The VOLUME CONTROL SETUPand MUTE LEVEL parameter can be used to set mute levels. Mute may be activated automatically or manually. For example, theRV-5 briefly activates mute when changing input sources orlistening modes. The amber Mute button LED lights whenevermute is activated.10  MAIN ZONE OFF BUTTONDeactivates the Main Zone.11  ZONE 2 OFF BUTTONDeactivates Zone 2.
Basic Operation Lexicon2-5REAR-PANEL OVERVIEWThe RV-5 rear panel is shown below. The numbers in the rear-panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text.1. Microphone Input Connectors2. Analog Audio Input Connectors3. Main Zone Audio Output Connectors4. Digital Input Connectors5. USB Connector Port6. Trigger Output Connectors7. RS-232 Connector8. Video Input Connectors9. Main Zone Video Ouput Connectors10. Component Video Input Connectors11. HDMI Input Connectors12. Power Switch13. AC Input Connector14. Amplifier Outputs15. IR In Connector16. Dock Connector17. Zone 2 Digital Audio Output Connectors18. Preamplifier Outputs19. Tuner Antenna Connectors254136 7 89101319 14161811121517
Basic Operation Lexicon2-6REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW (continued)CAUTION! Never make or break connections to the RV-5unless the RV-5 and all associated components arepowered off.1 MICROPHONE INPUT CONNECTORProvides a microphone input for speaker calibration.2  ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORSProvides analog audio inputs.  Eight connectors labeled Front L/R,Center, LFE, Side L/R and Rear L/R are available.3  MAIN ZONE AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORSProvides analog audio outputs in the Main Zone. Six stereo analogaudio input connectors labeled 1 to 6 are available.  4  DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS Provides digital audio input in the Main Zone. Four S/PDIF coaxialand four S/PDIF optical (Toslink) input connectors are available.Connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2 and 96kHz),Dolby Digital, and DTS(-ES) sources. Connectors are not compatiblewith MPEG (MP3) sources.5  USB CONNECTOR PORTProvides a USB port to connect to a compatible computer runningWindows® 2000, Windows® XP, or higher with the latest servicepacks installed to listen to audio from the computer through the RV-5.  The USB connector port is a “Mini B” connector and can also beused to connect a compatible computer to the RV-5 for firmwareupgrades, when available.  See page xxxx for more information onplayback of computer audio.6  TRIGGER OUTPUT CONNECTORSProvide 12V DC output to control connected components. Twotrigger output connectors are available on a removable terminalblock. The PWR connector (the power trigger output connector) isnot configurable. It is activated when the RV-5 is powered on, anddeactivated when the RV-5 is powered off from the rear panel or byputting the RV-5 into standby. The trigger output connector(labeled 1) can be configured for remote or program operation. See“Trigger Setup” on page 3-70 for more information.7  RS-232 CONNECTORThe RS-232 serial connector provides serial control and is used toperform configuration downloads and flash memory softwareupgrades. 8  VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORSProvides the Main Zone video inputs. Four composite videoconnectors labeled 1 to 4 and four S-Video connectors labeled 1 to4 are available.
RV-5 Basic Operation2-79  MAIN ZONE VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORSProvides the Main Zone video outputs. One composite videoconnector, one S-Video connector, one component videoconnector, and one HDMI video connector are available.10  COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORSProvides inputs that can be used with any source device that isequipped with analog Y/Pr/Pb or RGB component video outputs.Three inputs, labeled Component Video 1 to 3, are supplied.11  HDMI INPUT CONNECTORSProvides two HDMI inputs for devices such as DVD player or HDTVtuner.12  POWER SWITCHUse the Power switch to connect or disconnect power from the ACInput connector to the RV-5. The I and O positions represent “on”and “off” status, respectively. When the RV-5 is powered on, thefront-panel Standby button or remote control On button can beused to activate and deactivate standby mode. When the RV-5 ispowered off, standby mode is not available.In the event of a power outage, the RV-5 will display a BROWNOUT,CYCLE POWER message. To turn the unit back on, use the rear-panel power switch. In this instance, the front-panel StandBy switchhas no effect.13  AC INPUT CONNECTORProvides power to the RV-5 through the supplied power cord.14  AMPLIFIER OUTPUTSProvide audio outputs to the speakers. Channels are labeled forFront, Center, and Rear speakers to facilitate surround system setup.Normally, the REAR Left & RIGHT speakers are used in the MainZone for 7.1 surround sound systems, but they can also be used asthe left and right outputs for Zone 2.The amplifier binding posts accommodate the followingconnectors: • standard 0.75-inch banana plugs • size 10-12 gauge spade connectors• up to 10-gauge bare wireSee the next page for additional amplifier information. 15  IR IN CONNECTORAccepts input of IR signals from infrared distribution equipment.One 3.5mm jack that accepts a stereo plug (Tip/Ring/Sleeveconnection) or mono plug (Tip/Sleeve connection) is available.
Basic Operation Lexicon2-8REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW (continued)16  DOCK CONNECTORProvides an input port for an iPod®, which can then be accessedthrough the RV-5.  To use this feature, the D-1 Dock option must beinstalled to the DOCK connector.  With a compatible iPodconnected to the RV-5, selecting the DOCK input allows you to playaudio programming from the iPod.  You can navigate the iPodusing the RV-5 remote and view any of the iPod menus through theRV-5 front panel and any video monitor connected to the RV-5.For more information on the D-1 Dock option and how to use yourRV-5 with an iPod, refer to page xxx.17  ZONE 2 DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORSProvides digital audio output in Zone 2. Two outputs are available,marked LEFT and RIGHT.18  PREAMPLIFIER OUTPUTSProvides outputs for an optional, external power amplifier for appli-cations where higher power is desired.19  TUNER ANTENNA CONNECTORSProvides two antenna connections for the AM/FM stereo radiotuner. AMPLIFIER OVERVIEWThe RV-5 features a 9-channel power amplifier with 140W perchannel.  Heavy duty gold plated 5-way binding posts are providedfor speaker connections.The amplifiers feature advanced thermal current and DC protectionfor each channel. Thermal protection monitors the temperature ofthe chassis and heatsinks and automatically deactivates the specificchannel(s) when they exceed their normal safe operating temper-ature. Current protection ensures that the output transistors areprotected by limiting the current capability which is determined bythe output voltage, while DC protection prevents DC andfrequencies below 10Hz from reaching the speakers. The amplifiers are designed to meet the highest standards of perfor-mance and sound quality. MAKING CONNECTIONS WITH THE AMPLIFIER OUTPUTThe amplifier output connectors can accept bare speaker wires,banana plug connectors or certain spade connectors. When usingbare speaker wires, loosen the connector, insert the wire into thetop of the receptacle, then tighten the connector. The sameprocedure should be used for spade connectors. Banana plugsshould be inserted into the outward-facing receptacle.Use heavy-gauge speaker cable to ensure low-impedanceconnections between the amplifier and the speakers. Observecorrect speaker polarity.CAUTION! Do not connect the outputs of one channel tothe outputs of other channels or to other amplifiers.
RV-5 Basic Operation2-9TUNER OVERVIEWThe RV-5 features an AM/FM stereo radio tuner. The front paneldisplays the currently selected frequency, band, listening mode andvolume. Forty presets can store AM or FM frequencies, identified bythe preset number/name and station frequency/band. For example:WABC/90.90 FM or Preset 02/10.30 AM. Two antennas aresupplied with the RV-5: one for AM and one for FM stereo. At aminimum, use of the supplied antennas is recommended to ensureconsistent tuner performance.The tuner can be setup to receive elements of the Radio DataSystem (RDS) broadcasts. Originated in Europe and now withlimited availability in the US, the RDS is a standard for broadcastingdigital data along with an FM radio broadcast. When the RDSoption is active and RDS data is received, the RV-5 tuner displaysthe identity of the broadcast station, receipt of alternate stationfrequencies and any additional text (referred to as RT or Radio Text)that the station broadcasts. For more information on RDS features,see “Tuner Setup” on page 3-72.SELECTING A STATIONBegin selecting a radio station by activating the built-in tuner input.To activate the tuner input, press the front-panel TUNER button orselect the TUNER option from the remote-control MAIN screen. Seethe “Tuner Setup” on page 3-72 for more information.Next, determine if the desired frequency band is active by pushing thefront-panel or remote-control AM/FM button to toggle between theAM and FM frequency bands. Once the frequency band is set, there are several ways to select a radiostation: direct station access, tune/seek access, scan mode and presets.DIRECT STATION ACCESS To access a specific frequency, use the numeric buttons on either thefront panel or remote control to enter the desired station frequency. To directly access a station from the front panel or remote control:1. Press the AM/FM button to select the desired band.2. Enter the three or four digit station frequency. For example, toload FM station 90.9, press 9-0-9. To load AM station 1030, pressthe AM/FM button to select the AM band, then press 1-0-3-0.Note:When digits are first entered, a “Loading Preset” status message appearsin the front-panel (and on-screen) display. When a third digit is entered,the RV-5 senses a frequency is being entered and changes the statusmessage to “Setting Frequency.”TUNE/SEEK ACCESSPress one of the Tune/Seek buttons on the front panel (/) orremote control ( /) to navigate to the next availablefrequency. For example, if the currently loaded frequency is101.7FM, press the Tune/Seek  button to load 101.9FM. Press theTune/Seek button again to load 102.1FM, and so on.Press one of the Tune/Seek buttons on the front panel (/) orremote control ( /) for 2 seconds to activate seek mode.Seek mode searches for the next available radio station. If the tuneris having difficulty locating stations, raise the sensitivity level. See“SCAN SENS” on 3-73 for more information.
Basic Operation Lexicon2-10TUNER OVERVIEW (continued)SCAN MODE Scan Mode scans through all available stations, pausing for twoseconds on each station before scanning to the next one. To enter Scan Mode: Press and hold the front-panel (/) or remote-control ( /)Tune/Seek buttons until SCAN or SCAN is displayed. To stop scanning:Press either Tune/Seek button.LOADING PRESETSTo load a preset:Enter a preset (number between 1 and 40) using the front-panel orremote-control number buttons. A “Loading Preset” status message appears in the front-panel (andon-screen) display. If a third digit is entered, the tuner switches overto Direct Station Access mode and the front-panel status messagechanges to “Setting Frequency.”To skip through available presets in order: Press the remote-control  or  button. For example, if preset 1 isloaded and the  button is pressed, the RV-5 will load preset 2 (orthe next available preset). If preset 1 is loaded and the  button ispressed, the RV-5 will load preset 40 (or the next available preset). Note: This feature is only accessible via the remote control.SAVING PRESETSThe RV-5 has 40 presets available for storing AM or FM stations. Thepresets are divided into four banks with ten presets per bank. It ispossible to store a combination of AM and FM stations in eachbank. Storing presets on the RV-5 can be accomplished from eitherthe front panel or the remote control. The operation is identical. To save a station as a preset on the RV-5:1. Press the front-panel or remote-control SAVE button. A statusmessage displaying ”Saving Preset” appears in the front-panel(and on-screen) display. 2. Enter a number between 1 and 40 to save the currently loadedfrequency as the corresponding preset. For example, if the tuner is currently playing 101.7FM, press the SAVE button, then the 1 button to save 101.7FM as preset number 1. Press the 1 button followed by the 5 button to save as preset number 15. Pressing more than two numbers resets the preset number to the third digit entered. Pressing the SAVE button a second time cancels the saving process.NAMING PRESETSPreset stations use a naming system based on the RDS system. In theUS, each preset channel is identified by the station's call letters, or whatthe broadcast information identifies as the call letters. In Europe andJapan, each preset channel is identified by the station's Program
RV-5 Basic Operation2-11Service (PS) name.If the RDS information is not available, the preset name defaults toPresetXX, where XX is the listed number position in the Preset menu.For example, if Preset #01 is FM 90.90 and the call letters are WABC,then the name for that position is WABC. If Preset #23 does notbroadcast their call letters, then that location is identified as Preset23 inthe menu.EDITING PRESETS It is possible to customize the name of each preset on the RV-5.To edit the preset name:1. Select TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU. The TUNERPRESETS menu contains a list of preset pages. PAGE 1 containspresets 1 through 10, PAGE 2 contains presets 11 through 20, etc.2. Select the page containing the desired preset. A list of presets appears.3. Select the desired preset. The EDIT PRESET menu opens and displays the preset call letters (or PS), frequency, and band.The EDIT PRESET menu options are as follows:• Select LISTEN TO PRESET to load the preset frequency.• Select NAME to customize the preset name. The preset namecan be up to eight characters long.• Select CLEAR PRESET to clear the frequency and band informa-tion from the preset.See “Tuner Presets” on page 5-2 for additional information.AUTOLOADThe RV-5 can automatically scan and store presets. This can beaccomplished only from the remote control. See “Tuner Setup(continued)” on page 3-74 for additional information.To start autoloading:1. Select AUTOLOAD from the MAIN MENU : SETUP : TUNER SETUPmenu.2. Press menu  to start AUTOLOAD.
Basic Operation Lexicon2-12REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEWThe RV-5 remote control provides full operation of the RV-5,including commands, such as menu navigation, that are notavailable from the front panel. It is also designed to provide controlfor the entire home theater system. This section provides a briefoverview of the remote control. For detailed operation/programming instructions and manufacturing codes, refer toAppendix C. OPERATION CONSIDERATIONSThe following factors can improve or impede remote controloperation.Note the following before operating the RV-5 remote control:• The remote control must be in line-of-sight with the front-panelIR receiver. Eliminate obstructions between the remote controland the IR receiver. The remote control may become unreliableif strong sunlight or fluorescent light shines on the IR receiver.• For optimal performance, position the remote control at a30-degree angle no more than 40 to 60 feet (12.2m to 18.3m)from the RV-5. Placing the RV-5 inside a smoked glass cabinetwill reduce the remote control range.• Remote controls for different components can interfere withone another. Avoid using remote controls for different compo-nents at the same time.• Remote-control batteries should be replaced as needed.
RV-5 Basic Operation2-13MAIN MENUUse the MAIN MENU to open the four mainmenu branches: MODE ADJUST, AUDIOCONTROLS, TUNER PRESETS and SETUP.MENU NAVIGATIONUse the remote-control arrow buttons to navigate the extensivemenu structure starting on page B-2. The table below indicates thenavigation commands that the remote-control buttons performwhen the Main Zone command bank is activated.Note:The DVD1 device has been preprogrammed to control the Lexicon RT-10and RT-20 disc players.MENU ITEM SELECTIONUse the remote-control Menu arrows to navigate menus and toselect menu items.To select a menu item on the open menu:1. Press the remote-control  and  arrows to highlight the desiredmenu item.2. When the desired menu item is highlighted, press the Menu MAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPArrow Navigation Functions• When a menu is open, press the remote-control Menu  arrow to select the highlighted menu item.• When no menus are open, press the Menu  arrow to open the MAIN MENU.• When a menu is open, press the Menu  arrow to close the menu and, in most cases, open the previous menu. Subse-quent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed. Whenthe MAIN MENU is closed, the menu structure is also closed.• When no menus are open, pressing the Menu  arrow button performs no function.• When a drop-down menu is open, press the Menu  arrow to select the current setting and close the drop-down menu.• When a menu is open, press the Menu  and  arrow buttons to scroll upward and downward through the complete listof menu items. The highlighted menu item appears in the front-panel display. All menu items appear in the on-screendisplay. A scroll bar appears in the left side of the on-screen display when menu items exceed the on-screen display’s topand bottom margins. The cursor automatically wraps to the next menu item when the first or last menu item is passed.
Basic Operation Lexicon2-14MENU OPTIONSSelecting a menu option opens another menu within the menustructure. For example, selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opensthe SETUP menu.PARAMETER DROP-DOWN MENUSSelecting some menu options opens a drop-down menu that containsa list of available parameter settings. For example, selecting theCUSTOM NAME parameter from the DISPLAY SETUP menu opens adrop-down menu which is used to select the ON or OFF setting.To select a setting in a parameter drop-down menu:1. When the drop-down menu opens, press the remote-control and  arrows to scroll upward and downward through thecomplete list of available settings. The current setting is displayedbeneath the parameter name in the on-screen and front-paneldisplays.2. When the desired setting appears beneath the parametername, press the  arrow to accept the setting and close thedrop-down menu.HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPHSSelecting some menu parameters opens a horizontal bar graph. Thebar graph indicates the position at which the current parameter settingfalls within the entire parameter range. For example, selecting the A/V SYNC DELAY parameter from theDISPLAY SETUP menu opens the horizontal bar graph shown below,which is used to adjust the amount of audio delay.To adjust a parameter setting with a horizontal bar graph:1. When the horizontal bar graph appears, press the remote-control and  arrows to increase or decrease the setting in the desig-nated increments. The setting appears to the right of theparameter name in the on-screen and front-panel displays.2. When the desired adjustments have been made, press the arrow to select the setting and close the horizontal bar graph.Note:Menu item selection instructions differ for certain menus. These instancesare noted throughout this user guide.SETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONPOWER MANAGEMENTDISPLAY SETUPON-SCREEN DISPLAYFRONT PANEL DISPLAYA/V SYNC DELAYCUSTOM NAMEEDIT CUSTOM NAMEONOFFOFFOFFA/V SYNC DELAY          OFFCUSTOM NAME            OFFOFF, 1 to 60msDISPLAY SETUPON-SCREEN DISPLAYFRONT PANEL DISPLAYA/V SYNC DELAYCUSTOM NAMEEDIT CUSTOM NAMEOFFOFF
RV-5 Basic Operation2-15COMMAND MATRIXThe command matrix describes the commands that the remotecontrol buttons perform when each command bank is active. 21345678BUTTON HOME MAIN PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE21Enters RV-5 standby mode.2Activates the RV-5.3Displays the MAIN Zone command bank, which includes commands that control the Main Zone.Displays the Main Zone Status.Selects the Dolby Digital listening mode family.Displays the Zone 2 Status.Toggles RV8 between 5 speaker and 7 speaker modes.4Displays the Zone 2 command bank, which includes commands that control Zone 2.Deactivates the Main Zone.Selects the DTS listening mode family.Deactivates Zone 2. Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone BALANCE to the left.5Displays the Zone 3 command bank, which includes commands that control Zone 3.Selects the Tuner input for the Main Zone.Selects the THX listening mode family.Selects the Tuner input for Zone 2.Sets the Main Zone Volume level to -15dB.6Displays the DVD1 command bank, which includes commands that control DVD1.Selects the DVD1 input for the Main Zone.Toggles between the current listening mode and the 2-CHANNEL listening mode.Selects the DVD1 input for Zone 2.Shows status menu for current Main Zone input stream.STAT2 button: see page 2-28 for more information.7Displays the DVD2 command bank, which includes commands that control DVD2.Selects the DVD2 input for the Main Zone.Analog Bypass Toggle.Selects the DVD1 input for Zone 2.Activates the RV-5.
Basic Operation Lexicon2-168Displays the SAT command bank, which includes commands that control the Satellite box.Selects the SAT input for the Main Zone.Selects the L7 FILM listening mode.Selects the Satellite input for Zone 2.Reserved for future expansion.BUTTON HOME MAIN PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2
RV-5 Basic Operation2-17REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS1. SYSTEM POWER OFF2. Displays the name of the selected device.3. POWER ON4. Device and function buttons5. Light6. Displays page number/currently selected device7. LCD page change8. FAVORITE9. HOME menu10. CHANNEL/Listening Mode (+/-)11. Previous channel12. VOLUME (+/-)13. MUTE14. TRANSPORT functions (PLAY, STOP, REWIND, PAUSE, REC, SKIP and FF)for VCR, DVD and CD15. JOYSTICK (left, right, up, down and center press)16. DISPLAY/AM/FM17. ENTER/SAVE18. MACRO buttons3145181615131267112489101417
Basic Operation Lexicon2-18*  History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled. Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.BUTTON HOME MAIN PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE29Selects the VCR command bank, which includes commands that control the VCR.Selects the VCR input for the Main Zone.Selects the L7 Music listening mode.Selects the VCR input for Zone 2.Adjusts the Audio Controls menu Main Zone BALANCE parameter to the right.10 Selects the TV command bank, which includes commands that control the TV.Selects the TV input for the Main Zone.Selects the L7 TV listening mode.Selects the TV input for Zone 2.Sets the Main Zone volume level to -30dB.11 Selects the CD command bank, which includes commands that control the CD player.Selects the CD input for the Main Zone.Selects the L7 Music Surround listening mode.Selects the CD input for Zone 2.Toggles the Setup ON SCREEN DISPLAY parameter.12 Selects the Phono command bank, which includes commands that control the associated device.Selects the Phono input for the Main Zone.Toggles between setting the input to auto, analog or digital.Selects the Phono input for Zone 2.Deactivates the RV-5.13 N/A Selects Page 2 of the Main Zone command bank.Selects Page 1 of the Main Zone command bank.Selects Page 2 of the Zone 2 command bank.Selects Page 1 of the Zone 2 command bank.14 Selects the Home command bank.15 Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages.16 History-dependent* Increases the Main Zone volume level in 1dB increments.Increases the Zone 2 volume level in 1dB increments.913161011121415
RV-5 Basic Operation2-1921345678BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2 DVD1 PAGE1 DVD1 PAGE21Enters RV-5 standby mode. Reserved for future expansion.2Activates the RV-5. Toggles RT-10 or RT-20 power.3Displays the Status ofZone 3.Resets the AUDIO CONTROLS menu BASS, TREBLE, and TILT EQ parameter to +0.0dB. Opens and closes the RT-10 or RT-20 disc tray.4Deactivates Zone 3. Decreases the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone BASS parameter in.5dB increments.Opens the RT-10 or RT-20 Top menu.Opens and closes the RT-10 or RT-20 Video Adjust bar.5Selects the TUNER input for Zone 3.Decreases the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone TREBLE parameter in.5dB increments.Activates RT-10 or RT-20 random playback.Opens the RT-10 or RT-20 Angle bar.6Selects the DVD1 input for Zone 3.Decreases the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone TILT EQ parameter in.2dB increments.Activates RT-10 or RT-20 repeat playback.Activates the RT-10 or RT-20 condition memory mode.7Selects the DVD2 input for Zone 3.Deactivates AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone LOUDNESS parameter.Activates RT-10 or RT-20 A-B repeat playback.Activates the RT-10 or RT-20 last memory playback.8Selects the Satellite input for Zone 3.Reserved for future expansion.Opens the RT-10 or RT-20 Setup menu.Creates up to five shortcuts for frequently adjusted RT-10 or RT-20 Setup menu parameters.
Basic Operation Lexicon2-20BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2 DVD1 PAGE1 DVD1 PAGE29Selects the VCR input for Zone 3.Increases the AUDIO CONTROLS menu BASS parameter in .5dB increments.Closes certain Setup menus without saving the changes.Activates and deacti-vates the RT-10 or RT-20 rear- panel video output connectors.10 Selects the TV input for Zone 3.Increases the AUDIO CONTROLS menu TREBLE parameter in .5dB increments.Activates the RT-10 or RT-20 display mode.Controls the brightness of front-panel display characters.11 Selects the CD input for Zone 3.Increases the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone TILT EQ parameter level in .2dB increments.Opens the RT-10 or RT-20 Subtitle bar.Activates the RT-10 or RT-20 search mode.12 Selects the Phono input for Zone 3.Activates the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone LOUDNESS parameter.Opens the RT-10 or RT-20 Audio bar.Activates the RT-10 or RT-20 program mode.13 Displays Zone 3 Page 2 command bank.Displays Zone 3 Page 1 command bank.Displays DVD1 Page 2 command bank.Displays DVD1 Page 1 command bank.14 Displays the Home command bank.15 Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages.16 Increases Zone 3 volume level in 1dB increments Increases RV-5 Main volume level in 1dB increments913161011121415
RV-5 Basic Operation2-21*  History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled. Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.2021232418171922 BUTTON HOME MAIN PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE217 History-dependent* Decreases Main Zone volume level in 1dB increments.Decreases Zone2 volume level in 1dB increments.18 History-dependent* Toggles between fully muting Main Zone volume level and restoring Main Zone volume level to its original level.Centers the AUDIO CONTROLS menu BALANCE and FADER parameters.19 History-dependent* Toggles between muting Main Zone volume level and restoring Main Zone volume level to its original level.Toggles between fully muting Zone 2 volume level and restoring Zone 2 volume level to its original level.20 History-dependent* Scrolls upward through listening modes.Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone FADER parameter towards the front.21 History-dependent* Scrolls downward through listening modes.Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone FADER parameter towards the back.22 History-dependent* If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press  to skip back to next available preset.23 History-dependent* Activates the Trigger output connector labeled 1.24 History-dependent* If the RV-5’s but-in tuner is the currently selected input, press  to skip forward to next available preset.
Basic Operation Lexicon2-22BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2 DVD1 PAGE1 DVD1 PAGE217 Decreases Zone 3 volume level in.1dB increments. Decreases Main Zone volume level in.1dB increments.18 Activates the 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX Ultra2 or the THX SurEX listening mode when a 5.1-channel THX source is present. Activates Dolby PLIIx+THX when a stereo source is present.Toggles between fully muting the RV-5 Main Zone volume level and restoring Main Zone volume level to its original level.19 Toggles between fully muting Zone 3 volume level and restoring Zone 3 volume to its original level.Toggles between muting the RV-5 Main Zone volume level and restoring Main Zone volume level to its original level.20 Increases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments. Scrolls upward through RV-5 listening modes.21 Decreases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments. Scrolls downward through RV-5 listening modes.22 If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press  to skip back to the next available preset.Skips to the beginning of the current chapter or track. Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of the previous chapter or track.23 Activates the output connector labeled Trigger 1. Activates playback of the loaded disc at regular playback speed.24 If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press  to skip forward to the next available preset.Skips to the beginning of the next chapter or track. Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of the next chapter or track.2021232418171922
RV-5 Basic Operation2-23*  History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled. Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.3031262932252728BUTTON HOME MAIN PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE225 History-dependent* If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press  once to tune to thenext available tuner frequency. Pressing for 2 seconds activates seek mode, which searches for the next available radio station. To enter Scan Mode, press and hold until the display shows SCAN or SCAN.26 History-dependent*27 History-dependent* When a DTS(-ES) source is present, toggles the ES decoding parameter,cycling through the AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.28 History-dependent* Deactivates the output connector labeled Trigger 1.29 History-dependent* Activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL listening mode when a 5.1- channel Dolby Digital source is present.30 History-dependent* When a menu is open, scrolls upward through menu items.31 History-dependent* Opens the menu structure and selects the highlighted menu item, which opens another menu, opens a parameter drop-down menu, or selects the highlighted parameter setting.32 History-dependent* When a menu is open, scrolls downward through menu items.
Basic Operation Lexicon2-24BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2 DVD1 PAGE1 DVD1 PAGE225 If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currentlyselected input, press  o nce to tune to the nextavailable tuner frequency. Pressing for 2 secondsactivates seek mode, which searchesfor the next available radio station. To enterScan Mode, press and hold until the displayshows SCAN or SCAN.When RT-10 or RT-20 playback is activated, scansthrough the disc in reverse direction.26 When RT-10 or RT-20 playback is activated, scansthrough the disc in forward direction.27 When a DTS(-ES) source is present, toggles theES decoding parameter, cycling through theAUTO, ON and OFF settings.Opens the RT-10 or RT-20 disc menu.28 Deactivates the output connector labeledTrigger 1.Stops playback of the loaded disc.29 Activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITALlistening mode when a 5.1-channel DolbyDigital source is present. Activates Dolby PLIIxMovie when a stereo source is present.Activates RT-10 or RT-20 pause mode.30 When a menu is open, scrolls upward through menu items.31 Opens the menu structure and selects thehighlighted item. When no menu is open,opens the MAIN MENU.Navigates to the right in the RT-10 or RT-20 menustructure.32 When a menu is open, scrolls downward through menu items.3031262932252728
RV-5 Basic Operation2-25*  History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled. Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.3433393537353638BUTTON HOME MAIN PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE233 History-dependent* When a menu is open, closes the menu and (in most cases), opens the previous menu. Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed. When no menus are open, shows the two-line status.34 History-dependent* When a menu is open, closes the menu structure. When no menus are open, shows the 2-line status.35 History-dependent* Numbers 0 to 9, are used to enter the frequency of radio stations or to save/loadpresets when the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input.36 History-dependent* If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, toggles between AM/FMfrequency bands.37 History-dependent* If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, pressing this button will save the currently selected tuner frequency into a preset slot. Also use this button when programming the remote. See page C-4 for additional information.38 History-dependent* Macro Buttons: M1 is for Macro 1, M2 is for Macro 2 and M3 is for Macro 3. See page C-9 for additional information on how to use and program macros.39 History-dependent* Activates the remote control backlight that illuminates the buttons and LCD screen for easier visibility.
Basic Operation Lexicon2-26BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2 DVD1 PAGE1 DVD1 PAGE233 When a menu is open, closes the menu and, inmost cases, opens the previous menu.Subsequent presses continue to close the currentmenu and open the previous menu untilthe MAIN MENU is closed. When no menus are open, this button performs no function. Navigates to the left in the RT-10 or RT-20 menustructure.34 When a menu is open, closes the menu structure.When no menus are open, shows thetwo-line status.Selects the highlighted RT-10 or RT-20 menu item.35 Numbers 0 to 9 are used to enter thefrequency of radio stations or to save/loadpresets when the RV-5’s built-in tuner is thecurrently selected input.Direct RT-10 or RT-20 title, chapter, group or tracknumber selection.36 If the RV-5 built-in tuner is the currently selectedinput, toggles between AM/FM frequencybands.Enters values 10 and above on the RT-10 or RT-20. Press once for numbers in the teens, twice for numbers in the twenties, and so on. Then press a number button (0 to 9) to enter a second digit.37 If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currentlyselected input, saves the currently selected tuner frequency as a preset. Also used to program the remote. See page C-4 for additional information.Deletes entries when RT-10 or RT-20 search modesand certain playback modes are activated.38 Macro Buttons: M1 is for Macro 1, M2 is for Macro 2 and M3 is for Macro 3. See page C-9for additional information on how to use and program macros.39 Activates the remote-control backlight to illuminate the buttons and LCD screen for easiervisibility.3433393537353638
RV-5 Basic Operation2-27UNDERSTANDING THE ZONESThe RV-5 features two zones of operation: the Main Zone and Zone2. The Main Zone controls audio and video signals in the primarylistening space. Zone 2 controls digital and analog audio andcomposite or S-Video signals for a second zone or recording device. The following are exceptions to independent zone operation:1. The same Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) input source can be simul-taneously selected for the Main Zone and Zone 2. However,different Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) input sources cannot bepresent in the Main Zone and Zone 2.2. Zone 2 can provide a 2-channel downmix of Main Zone multi-channel audio when all of the following conditions are met:• The same input must be selected in the Main Zone andZone 2.• A Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) or 5.1a input source must bepresent in the Main Zone.• The INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN parameter must be set toDMIX. See “ZONE2 in Parameter Settings” on page 3-22 formore information.3. The Zone 2 audio output connectors will receive Front L/R whena 5.1a source is present in the Main Zone and the  ZONE2 INparameter is set to ANLG.4. When 5.1a BYPASS or 2-CH BYPASS is selected, a downmix toZone 2 is not available.TWO-LINE STATUSThe two-line status opens in the on-screen and front-panel displayswhenever the RV-5 detects a change in input source or listening mode.The Main Zone two-line status appears when the RV-5 detects a MainZone change, and the Zone 2 (or Zone 3) two-line status appearswhen a Zone 2 (or Zone 3) status change is detected.The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is used tocontrol the length of time the two-line status appears in the on-screen display. The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu POSITIONparameter is used to control the vertical alignment of the two-linestatus in the display device screen.Note:When the display device is connected to a component video outputconnector and the MAIN ADV menu COMPONENT OSD parameter is setto OFF, the on-screen display does not appear on the associated display.MAIN ZONE TWO-LINE STATUSOpens in the on-screen and front-paneldisplays whenever the RV-5 detects a MainZone status change. The Main Zone two-linestatus indicates the current input, input source, listening mode andvolume level selected in the Main Zone.ZONE 2 TWO-LINE STATUSOpens in the on-screen and front-panel displayswhenever the RV-5 detects a Zone 2 statuschange. The Zone 2 two-line status indicates thecurrent input, input source and volume level selected in Zone 2.DVD1          D          VOLFILM -34dBDVD1     ANLG          VOLZONE 2 -34dB
Basic Operation Lexicon2-28TUNER STATUSThe Tuner status indicates the current frequency,band, listening mode and volume level. TheTuner status takes the place of the two-line statusdisplay for inputs using the built-in tuner.STATUS MENUSPressing the remote control STAT2 button opens the STATUS menufor the current input source of the Main Zone, which containsparameters that provide information about the current input sourceand listening mode. STATUS menus are available for 2-channel,Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) and 5.1 analog input sources. Unlike mostother menus, STATUS menus cannot be opened through theselection of menu options. Rather, the remote control STAT2 buttonmust be pressed.To open and navigate the STATUS menu for the current inputsource:1. Under Zone 2 page 2, press “STAT2.” The first page of theSTATUS menu for the current input source appears in the on-screen and front-panel displays.If the STATUS menu includes a second page, the PG1 indicator appears in the top-right corner of the menu. Press the STAT2 button to open the second page. If the STATUS menu does not include a second page, pressing the STAT2 button closes the menu. If this occurs, begin again with step 1.2. When the desired STATUS menu page has been opened, pressthe remote-control Menu  and  arrows to scroll upward anddownward through the complete list of available parameters.Note:STATUS menu parameters provide information about the currentinput source and listening mode. These parameters cannot beadjusted.3. Press the STAT2 button or the Menu   arrow to close theSTATUS menu. If the second page of the STATUS menu opens,press the STAT2 button or the Menu  arrow again to close theSTATUS menu. STATUS menu descriptions begin on the next page. The table beneath each description lists the default and possible settings for each parameter. STATUS menu parameter descriptions begin on page 2-33. STATUS menu level meters are described on page 2-34.DVD1                   90.9 FML7 MUSIC -34dB
RV-5 Basic Operation2-292CH STATUSProvides information about 2-channel input sources. Features L andR level meters.See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.D STATUSProvides information about Dolby Digital input sources. FeaturesL, C, R, SL, SR and LFE level meters.See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.Parameter Possible SettingsINPUT The current inputMODE The current listening modeINPUT TYPE ANLG, PCMSAMPLE RATE 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz2CH STATUSINPUTMODEINPUT TYPESAMPLE RATEdB0-6-15-30-45RLParameter Possible SettingsINPUT The current inputMODE The current listening modeCHANNELS 3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0BIT RATE 32 to 640kbpsEX ENCODED MATRIX, NONESAMPLE RATE 48kHz2.0 ENCODING MATRIX, NONEDIALOG OFFSET –27 to +4dBMIX ROOM SMALL, LARGECENTER MIX LVL –3.0dB, –4.5dB, –6.0dBSURR MIX LVL +0.0dB, –3.0dB, –6.0dB     D STATUSINPUTMODECHANNELSBIT RATERLEX ENCODEDPG1CSLSR LFEdB0-6-15-30-45     D STATUSSAMPLE RATEPG22.0 ENCODINGDIALOG OFFSETMIX ROOMCENTER MIX LVLSURR MIX LVL
Basic Operation Lexicon2-30STATUSProvides information about DTS(-ES) input sources. Includes L, C, R,SL, SR, SB and LFE level meters. The SB level meter appears when a6.1-channel input source is present, or when a 5.1-channel inputsource is present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON.See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.5.1a BYPASS STATUSProvides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources whenthe MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON.See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.Parameter Possible SettingsINPUT The current inputMODE The current listening modeCHANNELS 3/3.1, 3/2.1BIT RATE 754.5 to 1509.7 kbpsES ENCODING DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFFWORD LENGTH 16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bitsSAMPLE RATE 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz            STATUSWORD LENGTHSAMPLE RATEPG1       STATUSINPUTMODECHANNELSBIT RATERL     ENCODINGPG1CSLSRLFE       STATUSWORD LENGTHSAMPLE RATEPG2dB0-6-15-30-45SBParameter Possible SettingsINPUT The current inputMODE 5.1a BYPASSINPUT TYPE BYPASS5.1a BYPASS STATUSINPUTMODE           5.1a BYPASSINPUT TYPE          BYPASS
RV-5 Basic Operation2-312CH BYPASS STATUSProvides information about 2-channel analog input sources whenthe MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.DIGITAL STATUSProvides information about digital input sources for which a samplerate is detected, but no audio is present in the input signal.See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.Parameter Possible SettingsINPUT The current inputMODE 2CH BYPASSINPUT TYPE BYPASS2CH BYPASS STATUSINPUTMODE           2CH BYPASSINPUT TYPE         BYPASSParameter Possible SettingsINPUT The current inputMODE The current listening modeINPUT TYPE ---SAMPLE RATE 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHzDIGITAL STATUSINPUTMODEINPUT TYPESAMPLE RATE
Basic Operation Lexicon2-325.1 ANALOG STATUSProvides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources.See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.LIVE! STATUSProvides information about LIVE! input sources. Features L and Rlevel meters.See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.Parameter Possible SettingsINPUT The current inputMODE The current listening modeINPUT TYPE ANLGSAMPLE RATE 96kHz5.1  ANALOG STATUSINPUTMODEINPUT TYPESAMPLE RATEANLG96kHzParameter Possible SettingsINPUT The current inputMODE The current listening modeINPUT TYPE MICSAMPLE RATE 48kHz2CH STATUSINPUTMODEINPUT TYPESAMPLE RATEDVD1LIVE! MEDMIC48kHzdB0-6-15-30-45RL
RV-5 Basic Operation2-33STATUS MENU PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS2.0 ENCODING MATRIX, NONEIndicates whether or not a matrix-encoded source is detected.When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a matrix-encoded source isdetected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a matrix-encodedsource is not detected. The RV-5 cannot automatically detect matrixencoding in non-flagged input sources.BIT RATE 32 to 640 kbps or 754 to 1509.7kbpsIndicates the rate at which the input signal is encoded. A higher bitrate indicates that less compression was used during the encodingprocess. Possible settings for Dolby Digital sources range from 32 to640 kbps. Possible settings for DTS(-ES) sources range from 754 to1509.7 kbps.CENTER MIX LVL –3.0dB, –4.5dB, –6.0dBIndicates the relative level of the center channel that was usedduring the mixing process.CHANNELS 3/3.1, 3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0Indicates the number of channels present in the input source. Thefirst digit indicates the number of front channels present. The digitafter the slash indicates the number of surround channels present.The digit after the decimal point indicates the presence of LFE (low-frequency effects) information. For instance, if the parameter settingis 3/2.1, an input source with three front channels, two surroundchannels and LFE information is present. LFE information is sent tothe Main Zone audio output connector labeled Sub.Possible settings for Dolby Digital input sources include 3/2.1, 3/2,3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0 and 1/0. Possible settings for DTS(-ES) inputsources include 3/3.1 and 3/2.1.DIALOG OFFSET –27 to +4dBIndicates the dialog normalization value applied to the input signal.Dolby Digital input sources reproduce dialog at 27 decibels below full-scale (–27dBFS). When the dialog normalization value of the incomingsignal is higher or lower, the DIALOG OFFSET parameter indicates theamount of adjustment the RV-5 makes to normalize dialog to –27dBFS.ES ENCODING DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFFIndicates whether or not a DTS-ES-encoded source is detected.When the parameter setting is DISCRETE, a discrete 6.1-channelDTS-ES source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX,a 5.1-channel DTS-ES source with a surround-encoded backchannel is detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, astandard DTS source with no DTS-ES encoding is detected.EX ENCODING MATRIX, NONEIndicates whether or not a Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded sourceis detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a 5.1-channelDolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX isdetected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a standard 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded without Dolby Digital SurroundEX encoding is detected. The RV-5 cannot automatically detect DolbyDigital Surround EX encoding in non-flagged input sources.
Basic Operation Lexicon2-34INPUTIndicates the selected input (e.g., DVD1).INPUT TYPE ANLG, BYP, PCM, MIC, ---Indicates the input source that is present. When the parametersetting is ANLG, a 2-channel analog audio source is present and theMAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to OFF. Whenthe parameter setting is BYP (Bypass), a 2-channel analog audiosource is present and the 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.When the parameter setting is PCM, a 2-channel digital audiosource is present. When the parameter is set to MIC, a microphonesource is present. When the parameter setting is ---, an unknowndigital audio source is present.MIX ROOM SMALL, LARGEIndicates the size of the mixing room that was used during themixing process. When the parameter setting is LARGE, setting theRE-EQUALIZATION parameter to ON for THX listening modes isrecommended.MODEIndicates the activated listening mode (e.g., L7 FILM).SAMPLE RATE 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHzIndicates the sample rate of the input source that is present.SURR MIX LVL +0.0dB, –3.0dB, –6.0dBIndicates the relative surround channel level that was used duringthe mixing process.WORD LENGTH 16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bitsIndicates the word length of the audio data present in the input signal.STATUS MENU LEVEL METERSMost STATUS menus contain level meters that indicate fluctuatinginput levels in the front left (L), center (C), front right (R), surround left(SL), surround right (SR), surround back (SB) and subwoofer (SUB)channels. These level meters indicate input levels for both analog anddigital input sources. For instance, the level meters indicate digitalaudio input levels when a digital audio source is present.Different combinations of level meters appear on each STATUS menu,depending on the source that is present. The SB level meter appearswhen a 6.1-channel source is present, or when a 5.1-channel sourceis present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON.Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow and red whenthe on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen background.Green indicates low levels, yellow indicates normal levels, and redindicates high levels and the onset of overload. Level meters appearin white when the on-screen display is not configured for a blue-screen background.
3SetupSetup ..........................................................................................3-2Input Setup.................................................................................3-4Changing Input Names............................................................................. 3-5Assigning Audio and Video Input Connectors ........................................... 3-7Selecting Preferred Listening Modes........................................................ 3-12Configuring Advanced Input Settings...................................................... 3-17INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings........................................................... 3-19ZONE2 in Parameter Settings.................................................................. 3-22Speaker Setup ...........................................................................3-25Setting Crossover Points.......................................................................... 3-25Speaker Setup Parameters....................................................................... 3-29Automatic Calibration ............................................................................. 3-36Manual Calibration ................................................................................. 3-53I/O Config.................................................................................3-60Display Setup ............................................................................3-63On-Screen Display Setup ........................................................................ 3-64Front-panel Display Setup ....................................................................... 3-66Volume Control Setup...............................................................3-68Trigger Setup ............................................................................3-70Tuner Setup ..............................................................................3-72Tuner Region Band Limit And Increments ............................................... 3-73Lock Options.............................................................................3-79LIVE! CALIBRATION ...................................................................3-80
Setup Lexicon3-2SETUP Selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens the SETUP menu.DISPLAY SETUPOpens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize theon-screen and front-panel displays, identify display connection types,and set the aspect ratio. See “DISPLAY SETUP” on page 3-5 for moreinformation.INPUT SETUPOpens the INPUT SETUP menu, which is used to change inputnames, assign audio and video input connectors, select preferredlistening modes and configure Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings.See “INPUT SETUP” on page 3-5 for more information.SURROUND CONFIGOpens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the on-screen and front-panel displays, restore audio/video synchronization,and create and activate a custom unit name. See “DISPLAY SETUP”on page 3-63 for more information.DOLBY CONFIGOpens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which is used to configureMain Zone, Mute, Zone 2, Zone 3 and Headphone volume levels. See“VOLUME CONTROL SETUP” on page 3-68 for more information.SPEAKER/EQ SETUPOpens the SPEAKER SETUP menu, which is used to configure theMain Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup,set speaker distances and calibrate output levels. See “SPEAKERSETUP” on page 3-23 for more information.POWER ON SETTINGSOpens the TUNER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the AM/FM tuner. See “TUNER SETUP” on page 3-72 for more information.MAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSDISPLAY SETUPSETUPSETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPINPUT SETUPSURROUND CONFIGDOLBY CONFIGMUTE LEVELSPOWER ON SETTINGSSETUP DISPLAY SETUPINPUT SETUPSETUPSURROUND CONFIGSETUPDOLBY CONFIGSETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPSETUPPOWER ON SETTINGSSETUP
RV-5 Setup3-3DISPLAY SETUPSelecting the SETUP menu DISPLAY SETUP option opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the on-screen and front-paneldisplays, restore audio/video synchronization, and activate and create a custom unit name.DISPLAY TYPE CRT, DLP, F-PRJ, LCD, PLASMA, R-PRJOpens the DISPLAY TYPE menu, which is used to assign the appropri-ate video display type. ASPECT RATIO 4:3, 16:9Opens the ASPECT RATIO menu, which is used to assign the appro-priate aspect ratio. The 4:3 aspect ratio is almost square and mostcommonly used for television. The 16:9 aspect ratio, also referred toas Widescreen, is almost twice as wide as it is high.CONNECTION ANALOG, HDMI/DVIOpens the CONNECTION menu, which identifies the type of videosignal that is input to the display.HDMI AUDIO OUT YES, NOOpens the ASPECT RATIO menu, which is used to assign the appro-priate aspect ratio. The 4:3 aspect ratio is almost square and mostcommonly used for television. The 16:9 aspect ratio, also referred toas Widescreen, is almost twice as wide as it is high.SETUP DISPLAY SETUPMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUP 7.1 SETUP: SURROUND CONFIGDOLBY CONFIGSPEAK/EQ SETUPPOWER ON SETTINGS5.1+DSPSETUPINPUT SETUPDISPLAY SETUPDISPLAY SETUPDISPLAY TYPE:ASPECT RATIO:CONNECTION:HDMI AUDIO OUT:ON-SCREEN DISPLAYFRONT PAN DISPLAYCRT4:3HDMI/DVIYESON-SCREEN DISPLAY SETUP2-LINE OSD:FULL OSD:OFF50sFRONT PAN DISPLAY SETUPBRIGHTNESS:TIME OUT:FULLOFFDISPLAY SETUPSETUP DISPLAY TYPEDISPLAY SETUPSETUP ASPECT RATIODISPLAY SETUPSETUP CONNECTIONDISPLAY SETUPSETUP HDMI AUDIO OUT
Setup Lexicon3-42-LINE OSD OFF, 3 TO 6 SECONDSOpens the 2-LINE OSD menu, which is used to set the time that the2-Line status display is visible. The OFF setting ensures that thedisplay is always visible. The 2-Line OSD can be set to turn off in 3 to6 seconds, selectable in 1-second increments.FULL OSD 30, 40, 50, 60 SECONDSOpens the FULL OSD menu, which is used to set the time that theon-screen status display is visible. The OFF setting ensures that thedisplay is always visible. The FULL OSD can be set to turn off in 30 to60 seconds, selectable in 10-second increments.BRIGHTNESS FULL, HALF, OFFOpens the BRIGHTNESS menu, which is allows the user to set thebrightness level of the RV-5 front display.TIME OUT OFF, 1 TO 10 SECONDSOpens the TIME OUT menu, which allows the user to set the time outperiod or to disable the time out feature. The time delay parametersare 1 to 10 seconds, selectable in 1-second increments.DISPLAY SETUPSETUP ON-SCREEN DISPLAY 2-LINE OSDDISPLAY SETUPSETUP ON-SCREEN DISPLAY FULL OSDDISPLAY SETUPSETUP FRONT PAN DISPLAY BRIGHTNESSDISPLAY SETUPSETUP FRONT PAN DISPLAY TIME OUT
RV-5 Setup3-5INPUT SETUP Selecting the SETUP menu INPUT SETUP option opens the INPUT SETUP menu, a two-screen menu which sets up the input type and name, thedigital and analog inputs for both audio and video, the listening mode, speaker configuration, and other advanced input settings.All INPUT SETUP menus are shown in the Appendix on page A-6. The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical,regardless of which input is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings differ from input to input.The INPUT SETUP menus shown in the Appendix indicate factory-default parameter settings for each input.INPUT HD, DVD, GAME, SAT, CABLE, DVR, CD, DOCK, PC, TUNER, AUX 1, AUX 2Opens the INPUT menu, which is used to assign the appropriate input type. INPUT SETUPSETUPThe DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section.Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu can be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in amenu path, any other input can be substituted.INPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPFLESHTONE NR:COMPNT ENHANCE:BRIGHTNESS: CONTRAST:COLOR:TEST PAT:100ADVANCED VIDEO 2MAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUPDISPLAY SETUP8-CH INPUT: SURROUND CONFIGDOLBY SURR SETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPPOWER ON SETTINGS5.1+A/DSETUPINPUT SETUPINPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1INPUT:NAME: ________DIG AUDIO:ANLG AUDIO:DIG/ANLG AUTO:A/D SAMPLE RATE:DVD 1ONHDMI 2NONEMODE FAMILY:MODE:48kHzSTEREO2-CHANNELINPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 2DEFAULT SUR:VIDEO IN: V-PROCESS:ZONE 2OUT:ADVANCED VIDEOONBYPASS- - -A/V SYNC DELAY:TRIGGER 2:HDMI 20 msANALOGUSE LASTUSE LASTON100100OFFONINPUT TYPE:SHARPNESS:NOISE REDUCTION: X-COLOR SUPRESS:DCDi INTERPOL:FILM DETECTION:FILM EDIT DETECT:ONADVANCED VIDEO 132ONONONONVCRINPUT SETUPSETUP INPUT
Setup Lexicon3-6CHANGING INPUT NAMESSelecting the INPUT SETUP menu NAME parameter opens the INPUT NAME menu, which is used to customize or restore the factory-default nameof the selected input. Factory-default input names correspond to front-panel and remote-control input selection button labels.EDIT INPUT NAMEOpens the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu, which is used tocustomize the name of the selected input. Custom input names caninclude up to eight characters.To customize the name of the selected input:1. Follow the EDIT INPUT NAME menu path to open the EDIT INPUTNAME drop-down menu.2. When the EDIT INPUT NAME menu opens, the current inputname appears on the second line. Using the remote-control  and  arrow buttons, change the character above the cursor (^).3. When the desired character has been changed, press the  arrowbutton to advance to the next character space. The cursor willautomatically wrap to the first character space when the lastcharacter space is passed.4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter all characters in the new name. 5. When the desired input name has been entered, press the  arrowbutton to close the menu and return to the INPUT NAME menu. The custom input name appears in the on-screen and front-paneldisplays. Both the custom and factory-default input names appear inthe INPUT SETUP menu. The custom input name appears against theleft margin of the on-screen display, and the factory-default inputname appears in parentheses against the right margin.DVD1 INPUT NAMERESTORE DEFAULT NAMEEDIT INPUT NAMEDVD      BUTTONS TO EDITUP TO 8 CHARACTERS    BUTTON TO ADVANCE>EDIT INPUT NAMEINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUPDISPLAY SETUP8-CH INPUT: SURROUND CONFIGDOLBY SURR SETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPPOWER ON SETTINGS5.1+A/DSETUPINPUT SETUPINPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1INPUT:DIG AUDIO:ANLG AUDIO:DIG/ANLG AUTO:A/D SAMPLE RATE:DVD 1ONHDMI 2NONEMODE FAMILY:MODE:48kHzSTEREO2-CHANNELNAME: ________INPUT SETUPSETUP NAME EDIT INPUT NAME
RV-5 Setup3-7ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORSThe RV-5 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to its ten digital audio, eight analog audio, the built-in tuner, the phonoinput, two HDMI video, four composite video, four S-Video or three component video input connectors. The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters thatcan be used to assign audio and video input connectors. Note:The digital audio input connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48,88.2 and 96kHz), Dolby Digital and DTS (-ES) sources. The digital audioinput connectors are also compatible with MPEG or MP3 sources throughthe DOCK input.DIG AUDIO COAXIAL-1 to 4, HDMI-1, HDMI-2, OPTICAL-1 to 4, NONEOpens the DIG AUDIO menu, which is used to assign a digital audioinput connector for the selected input. The RV-5 has ten configurableinputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its ten digital audioinput connectors.Please note the following:• When no digital audio input connector is assigned, the RV-5 willautomatically set the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECTparameter to ANALOG (see page 3-15).• A digital audio input connector must be assigned when noanalog audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the next pagefor information about assigning an analog audio inputconnector.DVD DIG AUDIOCOAXIAL-2COAXIAL-3COAXIAL-4OPTICAL-1OPTICAL-2OPTICAL-3OPTICAL-4INPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUPDISPLAY SETUP8-CH INPUT: SURROUND CONFIGDOLBY SURR SETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPPOWER ON SETTINGS5.1+A/DSETUPINPUT SETUPHDMI 2NONEHDMI 1HDMI 2COAXIAL-1INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1INPUT:DIG AUDIO:ANLG AUDIO:DIG/ANLG AUTO:A/D SAMPLE RATE:DVD 1ONHDMI 2NONEMODE FAMILY:MODE:48kHzSTEREO2-CHANNELNAME: ________Parameter Possible SettingsDIG AUDIO COAX-1 to 4, HDMI-1, HDMI-2, OPTICAL-1 to 4, NONEANLG AUDIO ANALOG-1 to 6, 7.1 CHANNEL, TUNER, NONEVIDEO IN COMPONENT-1 to 3, COMPOSITE-1 to 4, HDMI-1, HDMI-2, S-VIDEO-1 to 4INPUTSETUP DIG AUDIO
Setup Lexicon3-8ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS (continued)ANALOG IN ANALOG-1 to 6, 7.1 CHANNEL, TUNER, NONEOpens the ANLG AUDIO menu, which is used to assign an analogaudio input connector for the selected input. The RV-5 has eightconfigurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its eightanalog audio input connectors.The appearance of the ANLG AUDIO menu depends on the configu-ration of the analog audio input connectors.• The ANALOG IN menu (A above) appears when the I/O CONFIGmenu 8 STEREO INPUTS option is selected (see page 3-60). • The ANALOG IN menu (B above) appears when the I/O CONFIGmenu 5 ST. & 5.1 ANLG option is selected (see page 3-61).• The ANALOG IN menu (C above) appears when the I/OCONFIG menu 2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG option is selected (seepage 3-61).Please note the following:• When no analog audio input connector is assigned, the RV-5automatically sets the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECTparameter to DIGITAL (see page 3-15).• An analog audio input connector must be assigned when nodigital audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the previouspage for information about assigning a digital audio inputconnector.• The TUNER input corresponds with the internal AM/FM radiotuner.DVD1 ANLG AUDIOANALOG-2ANALOG-3ANALOG-4ANALOG-5ANALOG-67.1 CHANNELTUNERINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUPDISPLAY SETUP8-CH INPUT: SURROUND CONFIGDOLBY SURR SETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPPOWER ON SETTINGS5.1+A/DSETUPINPUT SETUPINPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1INPUT:DIG/ANLG AUTO:A/D SAMPLE RATE:DVD 1ONMODE FAMILY:MODE:48kHzSTEREO2-CHANNELNAME: ________NONEANALOG-1DIG AUDIO: HDMI 2ANLG AUDIO: NONEINPUTSETUP ANLG AUDIO
RV-5 Setup3-9DIG/ANLG AUTO ON, OFFOpens the DIG/ANLG AUTO menu, which ...A/D SAMPLE RATE 48kHz, 96kHzOpens the A/D SAMPLE RATE menu, which...VIDEO IN HDMI-1, HDMI-2, COMPONENT-1 to 3, S-VIDEO-1 to 4, COMPOSITE-1 to 4Opens the VIDEO IN menu, which is used to assign the inputconnector for the selected input. The RV-5 has thirteen configurablevideo inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its two HDMI,four component, four S-Video, or four composite input connectors.Note:Composite video output connectors are available when a composite orS-Video source is present. S-Video output connectors are available whenan S-Video source is present. The HDMI output connectors are availablewhen there is an HDMI source present.DVD1 VIDEO INCOMPONENT 2COMPONENT 3S-VIDEO 1S-VIDEO 2S-VIDEO 3S-VIDEO 4COMPOSITE 1INPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUPDISPLAY SETUP8-CH INPUT: SURROUND CONFIGDOLBY SURR SETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPPOWER ON SETTINGS5.1+A/DSETUPINPUT SETUPINPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1INPUT:DIG AUDIO:ANLG AUDIO:DIG/ANLG AUTO:A/D SAMPLE RATE:DVD 1ONHDMI 2NONEMODE FAMILY:MODE:48kHzSTEREO2-CHANNELNAME: ________HDMI 1COMPONENT 1ONOFFINPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 2DEFAULT SUR:VIDEO IN: V-PROCESS:ZONE 2OUT:ADVANCED VIDEOONBYPASS- - -A/V SYNC DELAY:TRIGGER 2:HDMI 20 msANALOGUSE LASTUSE LASTHDMI 2COMPOSITE 2COMPOSITE 3COMPOSITE 496kHz48kHzINPUT SETUPSETUP DIG/ANLG AUTOINPUTINPUT SETUPSETUP A/D SAMPLE RATEINPUTINPUT SETUPSETUP VIDEO ININPUT
Setup Lexicon3-10SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODESPreferred listening modes can be pre-selected so that when aparticular type of input source is played, the pre-selected listeningmode is activated. The RV-5 allows five preferred listening modes for each Main Zoneinput: one listening mode each for 2-channel, Dolby Digital,DTS(-ES), 5.1a and MIC (LIVE!) sources. The table to the rightindicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used toselect preferred listening modes.Menus showing DVD1 parameters selected as preferred listening modes. Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters2-CH Selects a preferred listening mode for 2-channel sourcesDSelects a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sourcesSelects a preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) sources5.1a Selects a preferred listening mode for 5.1 analog sourcesMICSelects a preferred listening mode for microphone sources (LIVE!)DVD1 2-CH MODEFILMTVMUSICMUSIC SURRPLII MOVIEPLII MUSICPRO LOGICNIGHTCLUBCONCERT HALLCHURCHCATHEDRALPANORAMA2-CH SURROUND2-CHANNELMONO LOGICMONO SURROUNDMONOHEADPHONEDVD1      D MODEFILMTVMUSICDIGITAL5.1 2-CHANNEL5.15.15.15.1 MONO LOGIC5.1 MONO SURR5.1 MONOHEADPHONE 5.1DVD1          MODEFILMMUSIC2-CHANHEADPHONEDVD1 INPUT SETUPNAMEDIGITAL INANALOG INVIDEO INCOMPONENT IN2-CH      DDVD1COAX-1NONEAUTOS-VIDEO-11FILM5.1     FILMFILMANLG IN LVLMAIN ADVANCEDZONE2 IN DIGITALZONE2 ADVANCED5.1a FILM5.1a INPUT SETUPDVD2TVSATVCRCDTUNERPHONODVD1MAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERLOCK OPTIONSLIVE! CALIBRATIONTUNER SETUPUSE LASTUSE LASTUSE LASTDVD1 5.1a MODEFILMMUSIC5.1a5.1a5.1a STANDARD5.1a 2-CHANNELHEADPHONE 5.1aUSE LASTPOWER MANAGEMENT
RV-5 Setup3-11When a preferred listening mode is selected, that listening mode isautomatically activated whenever a new input is selected or anappropriate input source is present. For example, the following canoccur when a preferred listening mode is activated (also refer to thecorresponding menus on 3-10): If the DVD1 input is selected and a 2-channel source is played, theL7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a Dolby Digital source isplayed, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a DTS(-ES)source is played, the DTS(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode is activated. Dynamic Listening ModesDynamic listening modes are only available under certain conditions.For example, many of the dynamic modes are only available whenthe RV-5 is configured for seven main output channels and source material with specific encoding is played. All Dynamic ListeningModes are available through the remote control or front panel Modebutton. The dynamic listening modes are listed in the table below. Modes that Do Not Appear in the Input Setup MenuThe RV-5 features the ability to assign preferred listening modes foreach input and incoming audio format. However, not all listeningmodes will appear in the Input Setup Menu. Listening modes that donot appear in the Input Setup menu as preferred listening modesunder any circumstances are listed in the table below. Dynamic modes2-Channel Dolby Digital DTSDolby PLIIx + THX Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital EX DTS THX or DTS THX UL2Cin or DTS ES THXDolby PLIIx MOV THX or THX UL2Cin or THX SurEX DTS or DTS ES MATRIX or DTS ES DISCRDolby PLIIx MUS THX MUSIC DTS THX MUSICDTS NEO:6 + THX 5.1 PLIIx MOV DTS L7 FILM or DTS ES L7 FILMDTS NEO:6 CIN 5.1 PLIIx MUS DTS L7 MUSIC or DTS ES L7 MUSICDTS NEO:6 MUSIC DTS 2-CHAN or DTS ES 2-CHANModes that do not appear in the Input Setup menu2-Channel Dolby Digital DTSDolby PLIIx + THX THX MUSIC DTS THX MUSICDolby PLIIx MOV 5.1 PLIIx MOV 5.1 MONO LOGICDolby PLIIx MUS 5.1 PLIIx MUS 5.1 MONO SURRDTS NEO:6 + THX 5.1 MONODTS NEO:6 CIN
Setup Lexicon3-12SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES (continued)The Use Last ParameterWhen the RV-5 is set to use a preferred listening mode for a selectedinput, selecting another mode from the Mode scroll list replaces thepreferred selection. However, this newly selected mode will be lostwhen switching between inputs. The USE LAST parameter was designed to allow the RV-5 software to“remember” the last used listening mode for a given input source.Once selected, that mode will always be active on the correspondinginput until another listening mode is selected as demonstrated in thefollowing example: 1. Select Main MenuSETUPINPUTSDVD1USE LAST.2. Press the MENU button.3. Press the DVD-1 button.4. Play a DTS input source.5. Press the MODE + button until you reach DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN.6. Press the TV buttonThe RV-5 switches to the TV input and the on-screen display identifies the preferred listening mode.7. Press the DVD-1 button. The on-screen display should identify that the active listening modefor the DVD1 input is still DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN. As the DTS(-ES)2-CHAN mode is a preferred listening mode, it can also be set inthe SETUP menu.When seven speakers are selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu, andthe appropriate source material is played, the dynamic listeningmode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu) canalways be accessed using the MODE + or MODE - buttons whetheror not a preferred mode is set. When a preferred listening mode is setand a dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in theinput setup menu) is active, the selected dynamic mode is lost whenswitching between inputs. When USE LAST is selected as the preferred listening mode, and adynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the inputsetup menu) is active, the selected listening mode is retained whenswitching between inputs, even when the RV-5 is set to standby as inthe following example:1. Select Main MenuSETUPINPUTSDVD12-CHUSE LAST.2. Press the MENU button.3. Press the DVD-1 button.4. Play a 2-channel input source.5. Press the MODE + button until you reach   PLIIx MOV. PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode.6. Press the TV buttonThe RV-5 switches to the TV input and the on-screen display identifies the preferred listening mode.7. Press the DVD-1 button.DTS NEO:6 MUSICModes that do not appear in the Input Setup menu
RV-5 Setup3-13The on-screen display should identify that the active listening modefor the DVD1 input is still   PLIIx MOV. This is the only method ofsetting up a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in theinput setup menu) to behave like a preferred listening mode.Note:When a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setupmenu) is set as in the above example, the setting is retained even whenthe RV-5 is set to standby.2-CHOpens the 2-CH MODE menu, which is used to select a preferredlistening mode for 2-channel input sources. The RV-5 activates theselected listening mode whenever a 2-channel source is present.When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST:The RV-5 activates the listening mode that was activated the last timea 2-channel source was presentThe remote control 2 CH button toggles between the 2-CHANNELlistening mode and the previous listening mode, and ignores the USELAST setting. Instead, it uses the listening mode (for example, L7FILM) that was activated before the 2-CHANNEL listening mode.The RV-5 activates a DTS NEO:6 listening mode if a DTS NEO:6listening mode was activated the last time a 2-channel source waspresent, and a 44.1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present. Sincethe DTS NEO:6 listening modes are dynamic, they cannot beselected as the preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources.DOLBY DOpens the DOLBY DIGITAL MODE menu, which is used to select apreferred listening mode for Dolby Digital input sources. The RV-5activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input isselected or a new Dolby Digital source is present.When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST:The RV-5 activates the listening mode that was activated the last timea Dolby Digital source was presentThe RV-5 activates the Dolby PLIIx MOV (Movie) listening mode ifthis listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital sourcewas present. Since Dolby PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode, itcannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for Dolby Digitalsources.INPUTSSETUP DVD1 2-CHINPUTSSETUP DVD1       D
Setup Lexicon3-14SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES (continued)Opens the DTS(-ES) MODE menu, which is used to select a preferredlistening mode for DTS(-ES) input sources. The RV-5 automaticallyactivates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is selected ora new DTS(-ES) source is present.When the DTS-ES parameter is set to USE LAST:• The RV-5 activates the listening mode that was activated thelast time a DTS(-ES) source was present• The RV-5 activates the DTS THX MUSIC listening mode if it wasactivated the last time a DTS(-ES) source was present. SinceDTS THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening mode, it cannot beselected as the preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) sources.5.1aOpens the 5.1a MODE menu, which is used to select a preferredlistening mode for 5.1-channel analog sources. The RV-5 automaticallyactivates the preferred listening mode whenever a 5.1-channel analogsource is present.When the 5.1a parameter is set to USE LAST:The RV-5 activates the 5.1-channel analog listening mode that wasactivated the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present. 5.1aMUSIC cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for 5.1-channel analog sources. However, when the 5.1a parameter is set toUSE LAST, the RV-5 will activate 5.1a MUSIC if this listening modewas activated the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present.INPUTSSETUP DVD1 INPUTSSETUP DVD1 5.1a
RV-5 Setup3-15CONFIGURING ADVANCED VIDEO SETTINGSMAIN ADVANCEDSelecting the INPUT SETUP menu MAIN ADVANCED option opensthe MAIN ADV menu shown above. The parameters on the left sideof this menu are identical, regardless of which input is selected. Thesettings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settingsdiffer from input to input.INPUT SELECT DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTOControls the interaction of the digital and analog audio inputconnectors assigned to the current Main Zone input. The INPUTSETUP menu is used to assign one digital and one analog audio inputconnector for the selected input. The table on page 3-17 describesINPUT SELECT parameter settings.Note:When the INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO, the RV-5 will not selectthe assigned analog audio input connector when a valid digital audioinput source is present. Some DVD and CD players output digital signals(data) when the player is paused or stopped or when the player ispowered on and the disc drawer is empty. When this occurs, the RV-5automatically selects the assigned digital audio input connector.DVD1 MAIN ADVINPUT SELECT ANALOG BYPASS S-VIDEO 16:9 S-VIDEO OSD 4:3COMPONENT OSDDIGITALOFFAUTOONOFFDIGITALANGLDMIXDIGITALANALOGAUTOAUTOOFFONOFFDVD1 INPUT SETUPNAMEDIGITAL INANALOG INVIDEO INCOMPONENT IN2-CHMIC      DDVD1COAX-1NONEAUTOS-VIDEO-11FILM5.1     FILMFILMANLG IN LVLLIVE! MEDMAIN ADVANCEDZONE2 IN DIGITALZONE2 ADVANCED5.1a FILM5.1a INPUT SETUPDVD2TVSATVCRCDTUNERPHONODVD1MAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERLOCK OPTIONSLIVE! CALIBRATIONTUNER SETUPLEGACY VIDEOPOWER MANAGEMENTFORMAT DETECT FASTABNORMALFASTAParameter Possible SettingsINPUT SELECT  DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTOANLOG BYPASS ON, OFFS-VIDEO 16:9  AUTO, OFFS-VIDEO OSD 4:3  ON, OFFCOMPONENT OSD ON, OFFLEGACY VIDEO A, BFORMAT DETECT NORMAL, FASTINPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED INPUT SELECT
Setup Lexicon3-16CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS (continued)ANALOG BYPASS ON, OFFWhen set to ON, the RV-5 passes the analog input signal to the MainZone audio output connectors. For stereo analog sources, the input issent to the FRONT L/R outputs. For a 5.1-channel analog source, the(L) input is sent to the FRONT L output. The (R) input is sent to theFRONT R output. The (C) input is sent to the center output. The(SUB) input is sent to the SUB output. The (LS) input is sent to theSIDE L and REAR L outputs. The (RS) input is sent to the SIDE R andREAR R outputs. When ANALOG BYPASS is set to OFF, the unit routesthe analog input signal through A/D conversion. This makes itpossible to utilize internal processing, including listening modes,crossovers and equalization. Neither Zone 2 nor Zone 3 providemultichannel outputs. If the 5.1-channel analog input is selected forZone 2 or Zone 3, only the front left and right (L)/(R) inputs will beavailable.When LIVE! is the selected analog input, the MAIN ADVANCED INPUT SELECT parameter is forced to ANALOG, and ANALOGBYPASS is disabled.Note: If the Main Zone source is 5.1 analog, only the Front L/R channels will besent to the Zone 2 S/PDIF outputs.S-VIDEO 16:9 AUTO, OFFControls the passage of anamorphic trigger signals present in somevideo sources. When set to AUTO, the RV-5 allows anamorphic videoinput signals to pass through the S-Video switcher, enablingcompatible display devices to automatically switch betweenanamorphic and non-anamorphic display modes. When OFF, the RV-5 prevents anamorphic video input signals frompassing through the S-Video switcher, preventing compatibledisplay devices from automatically switching between anamorphicand non-anamorphic display modes.INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED ANALOG BYPASS INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED S-VIDEO 16:9
RV-5 Setup3-17INPUT SELECT PARAMETER SETTINGSDIGITAL ANALOG AUTOThe RV-5 sends the assigned digital audioinput connector to the Main Zone audiooutput connectors. The RV-5 ignores theassigned analog audio input connector.Note the following:• The digital audio input connectorsare compatible with PCM (44.1, 48,88.2 and 96kHz), Dolby Digital andDTS(-ES) sources. • The digital audio input connectorsare not compatible with MPEG orMP3 sources. If an incompatibledigital audio source (e.g., MPEG orMP3) is present, the RV-5 automati-cally selects the assigned analogaudio input connector. • The RV-5 automatically sets theINPUT SELECT parameter to DIGITALwhen the ANALOG IN parameter isset to NONE.• If ANALOG IN is set to NONE, theRV-5 will mute.•The DIGITAL IN parameter can beused to assign a digital audio inputconnector for the selected input.The RV-5 sends the assigned analog audio inputconnector to the Main Zone audio outputconnectors. The RV-5 ignores the digital audioinput connector.Note the following:• The RV-5 automatically sets the INPUTSELECT parameter to ANALOG when theDIGITAL IN parameter is set to NONE. • The ANALOG IN parameter can be used toassign an analog audio input connectorfor the selected input.The RV-5 toggles between sending the assigneddigital and analog audio input connectors to theMain Zone audio output connectors, based on theinput source that is present.For example:• When a 2-channel PCM, Dolby Digital orDTS(-ES) source is present, the RV-5automatically selects the assigned digitalaudio input connector.•When an SACDTM source is present, the RV-5 automatically selects the assigned analogaudio input connector.Note the following:• The RV-5 automatically sets the INPUT SELECTparameter to AUTO when both digital andanalog audio input connectors are assigned.• When no compatible digital source ispresent, the RV-5 automatically selects theassigned analog audio input connector. • The AUTO setting is recommended forcomponents that generate both digital andanalog input signals, such as DVD/SACDplayers.
Setup Lexicon3-18CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS (continued)S-VIDEO OSD 4:3 ON, OFFControls the appearance of the on-screen display when the displaydevice is connected to an S-Video output connector. When set toON, the display device shows the on-screen display in a 4:3 aspectratio, regardless of the incoming signal.Aspect ratio refers to the ratio between the height and width of thepicture on the display device or to the ratio between the height andwidth of the display device. A 4:3 aspect ratio is almost square. A16:9 aspect ratio, often referred to as “widescreen,” is almost twice aswide as it is high.When OFF, the display device shows the on-screen display in thesame aspect ratio as the incoming video input signal.Note:The on-screen display appears horizontally stretched across the displaydevice screen when all of the following conditions are present:• The S-VIDEO OSD 4:3 parameter is OFF.• An anamorphic video input signal is present.• A 16:9 display device (widescreen) is connected to an S-Videooutput connector.COMPONENT OSD  ON, OFFControls the appearance of the on-screen display when the displaydevice is connected to the component video output connector.When ON, the display device shows the on-screen display as a 480ivideo signal on a full blue-screen background. To minimize viewingdistractions, the two-line status does not appear in the on-screendisplay. When OFF, the display device does not show the on-screendisplay, including the two-line status.Note:When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu BACKGROUND parameter is OFF,the display device using the component video output connector will notshow the on-screen display.INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED S-VIDEO OSD 4-3INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED COMPONENT OSD
RV-5 Setup3-19LEGACY VIDEO A, BWhen video played back from a VCR is converted to componentvideo by the RV-5, the resulting picture quality depends on both thequality of the VCR playback and the capabilities of the componentdisplay device. The LEGACY VIDEO menu item has two selections, Aand B. Use the one that gives the best picture for the Combination ofthe VCR and display device.Note:Some combinations of VCR and display device may not produce asatisfactory picture with either setting. In such cases, better results may beachieved by connecting to the display device via composite or S-video.FORMAT DETECT NORMAL, FASTControls how the RV-5 reacts when it detects silence in the digitalaudio stream. Digital sources typically output a short period of silencewhen switching between sources.When set to NORMAL, the RV-5 will not mute when silence isdetected. This setting is appropriate for most sources.When set to FAST, the RV-5 will mute when approximately 2ms ofcontinuous digital silence is detected. Once valid audio is received,the RV-5 will configure its processing and deactivate mute. Thisprevents digital noise from occurring during digital audio signalchanges. For example, when switching from Dolby Digital to DTS.Use this setting if audible noise occurs during input digital formatchanges.ZONE2 IN DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIXControls the interaction of the digital and analog audio inputconnectors assigned to the current Zone 2 inputs. The INPUT SETUPmenu can be used to assign one digital and one analog inputconnector for the selected input. See page 3-7 for more information.The table on the next page describes ZONE2 IN parameter settings.NoteWhen using DTS-encoded discs, set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX. When the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL, the unit recognizesDTS-encoded discs as audio signals (not data signals) and outputsloud digital noise from the ZONE2 analog and digital audio outputs.For maximum flexibility with Dolby Digital and DTS (-ES) sources:1. Select a Main Zone DIGITAL IN connector.2. Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to ANLG. 3. Connect the digital and analog outputs on the DVD player to thecorresponding digital and analog inputs on the RV-5. The unit will use the digital connector for the Main Zone, and theanalog connectors for Zone 2.INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED LEGACY VIDEOINPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED FORMAT DETECTINPUTSSETUP DVD1 ZONE2 IN
Setup Lexicon3-20ZONE2 IN PARAMETER SETTINGSDIGITAL ANLG (Analog) DMIX (Downmix)• The RV-5 automatically setsthe ZONE2 IN parameter toDIGITAL when the ANALOGIN parameter is set to NONE.• The RV-5 sends the assignedDIGITAL IN connectorspecified in the INPUT SETUPmenu to the ZONE 2ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIOOUTPUTS. • Only PCM digital inputsources are compatible withZONE 2 analog audiooutputs. Dolby Digital andDTS sources are compatiblewith the Zone 2 digital audiooutput when the DIG BYPASSparameter is set to ON.• Audio will not be available inZone 2 analog outputs whena Dolby Digital, DTS (-ES) orunknown digital input sourceis present.• The ANALOG IN connectorspecified in the INPUT SETUPmenu is sent to the ZONE 2ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIOOUTPUTS.• Only Front L/R Audio will beavailable in Zone 2 when oneof the 5.1 analog inputs isselected for the Main Zone.• Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX to send a downmixedversion of Main Zone audio to the Zone 2 audio outputconnectors. Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital,DTS(-ES) and 5.1a sources.• To generate a downmix, the same input must be selected inthe Main Zone and Zone 2. Otherwise, the Zone 2 audiooutput connectors will mute.• Main Zone listening mode activation affects the Zone 2 audiooutput connectors. For instance, when the MONO listeningmode is activated in the Main Zone, the Zone 2 audio outputconnectors will generate mono output signals.• It is recommended that you set the ZONE2 IN parameter toDMIX when recording from a DVD player without built-inDolby Digital or DTS-ES decoding to a VCR or PVR (e.g. Tivo®or Replay TV®).• A 2-channel downmixed version of Main Zone audio is sent tothe ZONE 2 ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS.Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) and5.1 analog input sources. To generate a downmix, the inputthat is selected in Zone 2 must also be selected in the MainZone (e.g., DVD1). Otherwise, the ZONE 2 ANALOG andDIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS will mute. Downmixes cannot begenerated when the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is selected inthe Main Zone.
RV-5 Setup3-21ZONE2 ADVANCEDOpens the ZONE2 IN menu, which is used to configure advanced ANLG IN LVL -18 to +12dBAllows adjustment of analog audio input levels for input signals sentto the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors. The RV-5 applies theseadjustments to input signals before passing them to the Zone 2digital audio output connectors. This parameter can be adjustedwhen an input source is present to prevent the internal A/D converterfrom overloading.INPUTSSETUP DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCEDDVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCEDANLG IN LVLDIGITAL BYPASS DIG OUT RATERECORD+0dBOFF44.1kHzENABLEDDVD1 INPUT SETUPNAMEDIGITAL INANALOG INVIDEO INCOMPONENT IN2-CHMIC      DDVD1COAX-1NONEAUTOS-VIDEO-11FILM5.1     FILMFILMANLG IN LVLLIVE! MEDMAIN ADVANCEDZONE2 IN DIGITALZONE2 ADVANCED5.1a FILM5.1a INPUT SETUPDVD2TVSATVCRCDTUNERPHONODVD1MAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERLOCK OPTIONSLIVE! CALIBRATIONTUNER SETUPPOWER MANAGEMENTParameter Possible SettingsANLG IN LVL -18dB to + 12dBDIGITAL BYPASS ON, OFFDIG OUT RATE 96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHzRECORD BLOCKED, ENABLEDINPUTSSETUP DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED ANLG IN LVL
Setup Lexicon3-22DIGITAL BYPASS ON, OFFAllows digital sources to bypass decoding for direct digital recording.When ON is selected, the RV-5 passes digital input signals directly tothe Zone 2 digital audio output connectors, preserving the originalformat of the input signal. This would be useful if you want to send amultichannel-encoded signal to a second device for decoding. WhenOFF is selected and the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL, DolbyDigital and DTS sources will not be passed to the Zone 2 digital audiooutputs. When OFF is selected and a PCM source is present, the RV-5will send the PCM audio to the Zone 2 digital audio outputconnectors. If a Dolby Digital or DTS source is present and theZONE2 IN parameter is set to DMIX, a downmix of the source will besent to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors.DIG OUT RATE 96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHzControls the sample rate of analog input signals sent to the Zone 2digital audio output connectors. When a value is selected, the RV-5 runs the Zone 2 A/D converters atthe selected sample rate. It is recommended to set the DIG OUT RATEparameter to the appropriate value when using a recording formatthat operates on a single sample rate, such as CD-R format (44.1kHz).Note:DIG OUT RATE only affects analog input signals. It does not change thesample rate of digital input signals, or downmixed signals.RECORD BLOCKED, ENABLEDPrevents recording device feedback loops. When BLOCKED isselected, the RV-5 blocks the Zone 2 audio output connectors toprevent feedback loops. However, the RV-5 still passes video inputsignals to the Zone 2 video output connectors. When ENABLED isselected, the RV-5 passes audio and video input signals to the Zone 2audio and video output connectors.INPUTSSETUP DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED DIGITAL BYPASSINPUTSSETUP DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED DIG OUT RATEINPUTSSETUP DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED RECORD
RV-5 Setup3-23SPEAKER/EQ SETUPSelect the SPEAKER SETUP menu to configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup. The Main Zone includes eightaudio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R.REAR AMP REAR SPK, ZONE 2Selects the REAR AMP menu, which....AUTOMATICSelects the AUTOMATIC menu, which controls the automaticselection of crossover frequencies, channel adustments, delayadjustments, and room equalization parameters.AUTO EQ ONLYSelects the AUTO EQ ONLY menu, which controls the automaticselection of the EQ.MANUALAllows the user to manually make the selections for both speaker andEQ setup.SPEAK/EQ SETUPSETUPMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUP 7.1 SETUP: SURROUND CONFIGDOLBY CONFIGPOWER ON SETTINGS5.1+DSPSETUPINPUT SETUPDISPLAY SETUPSPEAK/EQ SETUPREAR AMP:AUTOMATICAUTO EQ ONLYMANUALREAR SPKMANUAL SPEAKER/EQSPEAKERSSPEAKER DISTANCESSPEAK/EQ SETUPOUTPUT LEVELSAUTO EQ: OFFADJUST EQ OFFSPEAK/EQ SETUPSETUP REAR AMPSPEAK/EQ SETUPSETUP AUTOMATICSPEAK/EQ SETUPSETUP AUTO EQ ONLYSPEAK/EQ SETUPSETUP MANUAL
Setup Lexicon3-24SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS (continued)MAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUP 7.1 SETUP: SURROUND CONFIGDOLBY CONFIGPOWER ON SETTINGS5.1+DSPSETUPINPUT SETUPDISPLAY SETUPSPEAK/EQ SETUPREAR AMP:AUTOMATICAUTO EQ ONLYMANUALREAR SPK SPEAKERSAUTO SETTINGS:FRONT L/R:OFF80 HzSPEAK/EQ SETUPCENTER: 80 HzSIDE L/R: 80 HzREAR/Z2 L/R: 80 HzMANUALSUBWOOFERS: 1SUB HPF: 20 HzSUB/LFE LPF: 80 HzSUB MODE: LFE ONLYMANUAL SPEAKER/EQSPEAKERSSPEAKER DISTANCESOUTPUT LEVELSAUTO EQ: OFFADJUST EQOUTPUT LEVELSAUTO SETTINGS:INPUT:OFFTEST TONE:SPEAKER DISTANCESAUTO SETTINGS:UNITS:OFFFEETFRONT LEFT: 12.0CENTER: 12.0FRONT RIGHT:SIDE RIGHT:REAR RIGHT:REAR LEFT:SIDE LEFT:SUBWOOFERS: 80 HzRESTORE DEFAULTS: NO12.012.012.012.012.0ONOFFADJUST EQTILT: OdBFRONT LEFT:CENTER:FRONT RIGHT:SIDE RIGHT:REAR RIGHT:REAR LEFT:SIDE LEFT:SUBWOOFER 1:RESTORE DEFAULTS: NOSUBWOOFER 2: 0dB+10dB- - -- - -+10dB0dBALL+5dB+10dB+5dBOFF
RV-5 Setup3-25AUTO EQ OFF, ONSelects the AUTO EQ menu, which controls the automatic EQcontrols.TILT -8 TO +8DBSelects the TILT menu, which controls.....Note:It is important to set crossover points before calibrating output levels or LIVE!. Setting crossover points afterwards could invalidate calibrated out-put levels and will invalidate the LIVE! calibration.ANALOG BYPASS ON, OFFWhen set to ON, the RV-5 passes the analog input signal to the MainSPEAK/EQ SETUPSETUP MANUAL AUTO EQSPEAK/EQ SETUPSETUP MANUAL ADJUST EQ TILTINPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED ANALOG BYPASS
Setup Lexicon3-26CUSTOM SPEAKER SETUPSSelecting the CROSSOVER SETUP menu CUSTOM SETUP option opens the CUSTOM SETUP menu, which assigns independent crossover points foreach Main Zone audio output connector. Possible crossover settings include FULL, FULL + SUB, and 10Hz increments within a 30Hz to 120Hzrange. The graphs shown on the next page indicate the frequency response of each crossover point.To configure a custom speaker setup:• Select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating ofthe associated speakers. For example, set the FRONT L/Rparameter to the crossover point closest to the low-frequencyrating of the front speakers.• Select the subwoofer crossover point equal to the lowestcrossover point of any of the other speakers. For example, ifCUSTOM SETUP menu parameters are set as shown above, setthe SUBWOOFER parameter to 40Hz – the lowest crossoverpoint of the other speakers.In a custom setup, low frequencies are generally redirected fromspeakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with thelowest crossover points. Signals lower than the lowest crossover pointare redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL,low-frequency signals, excluding LFE information, are not redirectedto the subwoofer.Low frequencies between the Subwoofer and any or all of the otherspeaker channels can be duplicated. To do this, select the FULL + SUBcrossover setting for the front, center, side or rear speakers. Makingthis selection can result in excessive bass.MAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGESTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSLIVE! CALIBRATIONSETUPSPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGCROSSOVER SETUPCUSTOM SETUPTHX SETUPCR     SR  RRL                      SL    RLMSUB80Hz 80Hz 80Hz80Hz80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80HzCUSTOM SETUPFRONT L/RCENTERSIDE L/RREAR L/R       ULTRA2 SUB  40 Hz60 Hz60 Hz60 HzOFFN/AAPARTSUBWOOFERBGCASA40 HzPOWER MANAGEMENT
RV-5 Setup3-27In general, low frequencies will be redirected from speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the lowest crossover points. Low-frequency signals lower than the lowest crossover point will be redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL, low frequencysignals, excluding LFE information, will not be redirected to the subwoofer.Low-pass filters attenuate high frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz.High-pass filters attenuate low frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz. The graph above does not show the THX 80Hz crossover point, which is 12dB per octave.High-Pass Filter Low-Pass Filter
Setup Lexicon3-28SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERSThe table below indicates the speaker setup parameters for config-uring the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speakersetup. These parameters are available in the CUSTOM SETUP andTHX SETUP menus.Speaker setup parameters perform the same function regardless ofthe selected speaker setup. When a parameter setting is adjusted onone menu, the corresponding parameter setting is automaticallyadjusted on the other menu. For example, when a THX speaker setupis selected, the crossover settings on the CUSTOM SETUP menu areset to THX 80Hz.* These parameters cannot be adjusted on the THX SETUP menu.† When the THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, the BGC parameter is not available (N/A). SPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP orSPEAKERSSETUP THX SETUPSET CROSSOVERS SET CROSSOVERSParameterCUSTOM SETUP Menu THX SETUP MenuDefault Setting Possible Settings Default Setting Possible Settings FRONT L/R* 80Hz  FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz THX 80Hz  THX 80Hz CENTER* 80Hz  FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE THX 80Hz  THX 80Hz SIDE L/R* 80Hz  FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE THX 80Hz  THX 80Hz REAR L/R 80Hz  FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE THX 80Hz  THX 80Hz, NONE SUBWOOFER* 80Hz  FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE THX 80Hz  THX 80Hz THX ULTRA2 SUB OFF  ON, OFF OFF  ON, OFF BGC N/A†  ON, OFF N/A†  ON, OFF ASA APART  APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER APART  APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER
RV-5 Setup3-29SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS (continued)MAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSCROSSOVER SETUPCUSTOM SETUPTHX SETUPCR     SR  RRL                      SL    RLMSUB80Hz 80Hz 80Hz80Hz80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80HzSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSCUSTOM SETUPFRONT L/RCENTERSIDE L/RREAR L/R       ULTRA2 SUB  40Hz60Hz60Hz60HzOFFN/AAPARTSUBWOOFERBGCASA40HzLIVE! CALIBRATIONSETUPSUBWOOFERFULL30Hz40Hz50Hz60Hz70Hz80HzTHX 80 Hz90Hz100Hz110Hz120HzREAR L/R SPEAKERSFULL30Hz40Hz50Hz60Hz70Hz80HzTHX 8 0Hz90Hz100Hz110Hz120HzNONESIDE L/R SPEAKERS FRONT L/R SPEAKERSCENTER SPEAKERNONEFULL + SUBFULL30Hz40Hz50Hz60Hz70Hz80HzTHX 80Hz90Hz100Hz110Hz120HzNONEFULL + SUBFULL30Hz40Hz50Hz60Hz70Hz80HzTHX 80 Hz90Hz100Hz110Hz120HzNONEFULL + SUBFULL30Hz40Hz50Hz60Hz70Hz80HzTHX 80 Hz90Hz100Hz110Hz120HzFULL + SUBSPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGPOWER MANAGEMENT
Setup Lexicon3-30FRONT L/R FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120HZ, THX 80HZAssigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectorslabeled Front L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens theFRONT L/R SPEAKERS menu to select a crossover point for the FrontL/R output connectors.•Select FULL  to send a full-range signal to the front speakers.Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low-frequency rating of the front speakers.•Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the frontspeakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines theupper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUBoption can result in excessive bass.When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point isapplied to the Front L/R output connectors, and the FRONT L/Rparameter cannot be adjusted. CENTER FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120HZ, THX 80HZ, NONEAssigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectorlabeled CENTER when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens theCENTER SPEAKER menu to select a crossover point for the CENTERoutput connector.• Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the center speaker.Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low-frequency rating of the center speaker.• Select  FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the centerspeaker and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output. (Theset crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the upperrange of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option canresult in excessive bass.• When the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, selectNONE to redirect center channel signals to the Front L/R outputconnectors – unless the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated. Inthis case, configure the speaker setup with the associated DVD-A/SACD player to redirect center channel signals.When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point isapplied to the Center output connector, and the CENTER parametercannot be adjusted. SPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP FRONT L/RSET CROSSOVERSSPEAKERSSETUP SET CROSSOVERS THX SETUPSPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP CENTERSET CROSSOVERSSPEAKERSSETUP SET CROSSOVERS THX SETUP
RV-5 Setup3-31SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS (continued)SIDE L/R FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONEAssigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectorslabeled SIDE L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected.•Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the side speakers.Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low-frequency rating of the side speakers.•Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the sidespeakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines theupper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB optioncan result in excessive bass.• When the speaker setup does not include side speakers, selectNONE to redirect side channel signals to the Rear L/R outputconnectors. If the REAR L/R parameter is also set to NONE, theRV-5 will redirect surround channel signals to the Front L/Routput connectors.Note:When the SIDE L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital SurroundEX, THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, DTS(-ES) decoding, the ASAparameter and PLIIx modes are not available. When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point isapplied to the SIDE L/R output connectors, and the SIDE L/Rparameter cannot be adjusted. REAR L/R FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONEAssigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectorslabeled REAR L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected.• Select  FULL to send a full-range signal to the rear speakers.Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low-frequency rating of the rear speakers.• Select  FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the rearspeakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines theupper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB optioncan result in excessive bass.• When the speaker setup does not include rear speakers, select NONEto redirect rear channel signals to the Side L/R output connectors. Ifthe SIDE L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the RV-5 redirectssurround channel signals to the Front L/R output connectors.Note:When the REAR L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital Surround EX,THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, PLIIx modes, DTS(-ES) decoding and the ASAparameter are not available.When THX speaker setup is selected, the THX REAR SPEAKERS menu openswhich is used to activate or deactivate the REAR L/R output connectors.To activate and configure the Rear L/R output connectors for a7.1-channel THX speaker, setup select THX 80Hz. To deactivate theRear L/R output connectors and configure the Main Zone audio outputconnectors for a 5.1-channel THX speaker setup, select NONE.SPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP SIDE L/RSET CROSSOVERSSPEAKERSSETUP SET CROSSOVERS THX SETUPSPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP REAR L/RSET CROSSOVERSSPEAKERSSETUP THX SETUPSET CROSSOVERS
Setup Lexicon3-32SUBWOOFER  FULL, 30 TO 120 Hz, THX 80Hz, NONEAssigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectorlabeled Subwoofer. When set to FULL, the RV-5 sends a full-rangeaudio output signal to this connector. Otherwise, the RV-5 activates acrossover point at the selected setting. Choose the setting equal tothe lowest setting of the other speakers.Note:When the SUBWOOFER parameter is set to NONE, subwoofer signalswill not be redirected if the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated. Toredirect subwoofer signals, configure the speaker setup with theassociated DVD-A/SACD player.SETUPMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSSETUPSETUPINPUTSSUBWOOFERFULL30Hz40Hz50Hz60Hz70Hz80HzTHX 80 Hz90Hz100Hz110Hz120HzNONECUSTOM SETUPFRONT L/RCENTERSIDE L/RREAR L/R       ULTRA2 SUB  40Hz60Hz60Hz60HzOFFN/AAPARTSUBWOOFERBGCASA40HzMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSLIVE! CALIBRATIONSETUPCROSSOVER SETUPCUSTOM SETUPTHX SETUPCR     SR  RRL                      SL    RLMSUB40Hz 60Hz 60Hz60Hz40Hz 40Hz 60Hz 60HzSPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGPOWER MANAGEMENTSPEAKERSSETUP THX SETUP SUBWOOFERSET CROSSOVERS
RV-5 Setup3-33SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS (continued)THX ULTRA2 SUB ON, OFFIndicates whether or not the subwoofer connected to the Main Zoneaudio output connector labeled Subwoofer is Ultra2-certified. Selectthe ON setting if the connected subwoofer is Ultra2-certified and theOFF setting if the connected subwoofer is not Ultra2-certified. Whenset to ON, the CUSTOM and THX SETUP menu BGC parameter canbe used to adjust boundary gain compensation. When set to OFF, theBGC parameter is not available (N/A).INPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERSTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSCUSTOM SETUPFRONT L/RCENTERSIDE L/RREAR L/R       ULTRA2 SUB  40 Hz60 Hz60 Hz60 HzOFFN/AAPARTSUBWOOFERBGCASA40 HzTHX SPEAKER SETUP!CAUTION!PRESSING THEBUTTON WILLAUTOMATICALLY CHANGETHE OUTPUTS TO A THXSPEAKER CONFIGURATIONONOFFAPARTCLOSETOGETHER* These parameters cannot beadjusted.THX SETUPFRONT L/R*CENTER*SIDE L/R*REAR L/R       ULTRA2 SUB  THX 80HzTHX 80HzTHX 80HzTHX 80HzOFFN/AAPARTSUBWOOFER*BGCASATHX 80HzCROSSOVER SETUPCUSTOM SETUPTHX SETUPCR     SR  RRL                      SL    RLMSUB40Hz 60Hz 60Hz60Hz40Hz 40Hz 60Hz 60HzSPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSLIVE! CALIBRATIONSETUPPOWER MANAGEMENTSPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP orULTRA2 SUB SPEAKERSSETUP THX SETUP ULTRA2 SUB
Setup Lexicon3-34BGC (BOUNDARY GAIN COMPENSATION) ON, OFFAdjusts boundary gain compensation when the CUSTOM and THXSETUP menu THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to ON. When theBGC parameter is set to ON, a highpass 55Hz filter is applied to allaudio output connectors for all Main Zone listening modes. When setto OFF, no filter is applied to Main Zone listening modes and audiooutput connectors. When the parameter setting is N/A, the THXULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, and boundary gain compen-sation cannot be adjusted.Note:BGC compensates for increased bass energy that is caused by theproximity of the speakers to the listening room walls.ASA (ADVANCED SPEAKER ARRAY) APART, CLOSE, TOGETHERA proprietary THX technology that processes signals sent to the rearspeakers, optimizing the listening experience for THX Ultra2 listeningmodes. To maximize the effectiveness of ASA processing, it is recom-mended that you configure a 7-channel speaker setup in which therear speakers are placed close together facing the center of thelistening space. The ASA parameter is not available unless the 5.1THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX MUSIC, DTS THX ULTRA2 or DTS THXMUSIC listening mode is activated.Select the TOGETHER setting if the distance between the rearspeakers is less than 1 foot (0.3m). Select the CLOSE setting if thedistance between the rear speakers is greater than 1 foot (0.3m), butless than 4 feet (1.2m). Select the APART setting if the distancebetween the rear speakers is greater than 4 feet (1.2m).Note:ASA processing is only available when both side and rear speakers arepresent.When the remote control 7/5 button is used to toggle between 7 and5-channel playback:• ASA processing is not available during 5-channel playback.• The RV-5 automatically switches between the 5.1 THX ULTRA2and 5.1 THX or DTS THX ULTRA2 and DTS THX listening modes.BGCTHX SETUPSPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP BGCSPEAKERSSETUP ASATHX SETUPSPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP ASASPEAKERSSETUP
RV-5 Setup3-35AUTOMATIC CALIBRATIONThe RV-5 offers automatic calibration of speaker distances, output level, or both. The table below indicates available automatic calibration options.A successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration can be performed. Automatic Options DetailsMICROPHONE CHECK • Confirms that the microphones are properly connected and functioning.• Calculates an average level for the microphones connected to the microphone input connectors,allowing the RV-5 to compensate for individual microphone sensitivities during automatic calibration.• Ensures that microphone levels are consistent, eliminating automatic calibration errors from individualmicrophone levels.DISTANCES & LEVELS • Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances and output levels.• Offers accurate calibration with minimal interaction, automatically applying calibrated speaker distancesand output levels.• Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listeningposition and the speaker.• Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/–0.5dB of each other and overall speaker outputlevels within +/–3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).DISTANCES • Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances.• Provides a comparison between original and calibrated speaker distances, allowing selection of thedesired values.• Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listeningposition and the speaker.LEVELS • Activates automatic calibration of output levels.• Provides a comparison between original and calibrated output levels, allowing selection of the desiredvalues.• Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/–0.5dB of each other and overall speaker outputlevels within +/–3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).
Setup Lexicon3-36CONNECTING THE MICROPHONESCAUTION!• The microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kitrequire careful handling. Dropping or otherwise physicallyabusing the microphones might cause errors during use orirreparable damage to the microphones.• The microphone wires also require careful handling. Do notsharply bend the wires or place objects on them.• Never make or break microphone input connections unlessthe RV-5 is powered off with the rear-panel power switch,OR standby mode is activated with the front-panel orremote control standby button.Note the following:• Automatic calibration requires the microphones included in theLexicon Microphone Kit, available at authorized Lexicon dealers.Performing automatic calibration with microphones other thanthose in the kit will produce unpredictable results. • Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving thedesired automatic calibration results. Pay particular attention tothe microphone placement instructions and illustrations includedin this section.• It is important to read and observe the care and handlingdocumentation included with the Lexicon Microphone Kit toensure optimal microphone performance.• If power is lost during automatic calibration of speaker levels orspeaker distances, previous settings may be lost and recali-bration of speaker levels and speaker distances is required.To connect the microphones:4. Make sure the RV-5 is powered off OR in standby mode.5. Connect the microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kitto the microphone input connectors on the RV-5 rear panel. Makesure the microphone cable plug is fully inserted for a solidconnection. During the microphone check, the microphones will bereferred to as 1 or 2, based on the input connector to whichthe microphone is connected. You should label the micro-phones for troubleshooting purposes.6. Power on the RV-5 or deactivate standby mode.
RV-5 Setup3-37POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR THE MICROPHONE CHECKRefer to the microphone placement examples that begin below to position the microphones for the microphone check.During the microphone check, positionthe microphones:3As close together as possible3Relatively centered between and equidistant fromthe front left and right speakers3In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers3In a location unobstructed by furniture and otherfixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibrationnoise signals3At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers andwalls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakersThe illustration to the right provides an example ofproper microphone placement during the microphonecheck. All of the microphones are positioned as closetogether as possible in an unobstructed location that isequidistant from the front left and right speakers.PROPER microphone positioning for the microphone checkFrontLeftCenterSubwooferFrontRightMicrophoneSideRightRearRightRearLeftSideLeft
Setup Lexicon3-38During the microphone check, DO NOT:7Separate the microphones7Scatter the microphones throughout the listeningspace7Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the micro-phones and the speakers7Position the microphones on the floor, on seatcushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture andother fixtures, where echoes might obscurecalibration noise signals7Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) ofspeakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)from any one speakerThe illustration to the right provides an example ofimproper microphone placement during the microphonecheck. The microphones are scattered throughout thelistening space rather than positioned as close together aspossible in a location that is equidistant from the front leftand right speakers. IMPROPER microphone positioning for the microphone checkFrontLeftCenterSubwooferFrontRightMicrophoneSideRightRearRightRearLeftSideLeft
RV-5 Setup3-39CHECKING THE MICROPHONESNote the following:• The RV-5 outputs calibration noise signals between 55dB and95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB incrementsuntil the microphones detect the required level. If thecalibration noise signal becomes too loud, press the  arrowbutton to cancel the microphone check.• Although the calibration noise signal is output at a fixed volumelevel, you should set all volume controls for associated compo-nents (i.e., speakers, subwoofers and power amplifiers) to areasonable level before performing automatic calibration.When the procedure is finished, the RV-5 automatically revertsto the last volume level that was selected before automaticcalibration began.• During automatic calibration, you should refer to the on-screendisplay instead of the front-panel display, as additional infor-mation and instructions are available in the on-screen display.1. Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu CHECK MICROPHONES option,as shown above. 2. The first CHECK MICROPHONES screen opens in the on-screendisplay, indicating the importance of proper microphoneplacement to achieve accurate automatic calibration results.3. Press the  arrow button to begin the microphone check. Thefollowing screens appears in the on-screen display as the micro-phone check is performed:CHECKING FOR SILENCEAppears in the on-screen display whilethe RV-5 determines the relative noiselevel of the listening space and theinternal noise level of the microphones.After eliminating microphones that arenot detected or not functioning, the RV-5 calculates an averagelevel for all microphones.SPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALCUSTOM SETUP40 Hz60 Hz60 Hz60 Hz40 HzOFFN/AAPARTCHECK MICROPHONESGROUP MICROPHONESINTO A BUNDLE IN THESET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGMIDDLE OF THE ROOMPRESS    TO BEGINMIC CHECKMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSLIVE! CALIBRATIONSETUPPOWER MANAGEMENTCUSTOM SETUPCHECK MICROPHONESCHECKING FOR SILENCEPLEASE WAIT
Setup Lexicon3-40CHECKING MICROPHONESAppears in the on-screen display whilethe RV-5 confirms the microphone levelcalculated during the silence check. Todo this, the RV-5 sends alternatingcalibration noise signals to the front leftand right speakers. These signals are output between 55dB and95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB incrementsuntil the microphones detect the required level. If the signalbecomes too loud, press the  arrow button to cancel themicrophone check.The RV-5 uses the calibration noise signal to eliminate micro-phones that register the signal at a level that is too low or toohigh. Then, the RV-5 determines the appropriate output level forthe calibration noise signal used during automatic calibration.CHECK MICROPHONES ResultsAppears in the on-screen display when the RV-5 is finishedchecking the microphones. This display indicates the individualcheck results for each microphone.• An OK result indicates that the microphone passed themicrophone check.• An ERROR result indicates that the microphone did not passthe microphone check.4. Press the  and  arrow buttons to highlight the desired micro-phone parameter. The RV-5 refers to the microphones accordingto the input connector to which the microphone is connected.5. Press the   arrow button to view more detailed results for theselected microphone. A message similar to the one shown at thebottom of the previous column opens in the on-screen display.Refer to the table on the next page for information about allpossible microphone check messages.Note the following:• The RV-5 retains the calculated microphone level until theSPEAKER SETUP menu is closed. Once this menu is closed,another microphone check is required before automaticcalibration can be performed.• Optional microphone kits that include two microphones areavailable. Perform automatic calibration with two microphonesthat have passed the microphone check. However, the RV-5 will perform automatic calibration as long asat least one microphone passes the microphone check. In thisCUSTOM SETUPCHECK MICROPHONESCHECKING MICROPHONESPLEASE WAITCHECK MICROPHONESMIC 1(MICROPHONE)                    OKMIC 2PRESS    TO VIEWDETAILSOKERROR
RV-5 Setup3-41circumstance, place the successfully checked microphone in theprimary listening position.• If a microphone check was successful, do not disconnect themicrophones from the microphone input connectors. If themicrophones are disconnected, you should perform the micro-phone check again before proceeding to automatic calibration.
Setup Lexicon3-42CHECKING THE MICROPHONES (continued)POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATIONProper microphone placement is essential to achieving the desiredautomatic calibration results. Microphone placement determineswhether the RV-5 calibrates optimal speaker distances and outputlevels for a single listening position, several listening positions in asingle row, or several listening positions in the listening space.• Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on thenext page to position the microphones for automaticcalibration. Select the microphone placement that best meetsthe needs of the listening space.Message Description TroubleshootingThe microphone detected the calibrationnoise signal without error.•N/AThe RV-5 did not detect the microphoneduring the silence check.• Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-nected to the RV-5 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.• The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.The RV-5 detected the microphone dur-ing the silence check. However, themicrophone level determined during thesilence check was not confirmed duringthe microphone check.• Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-nected to the RV-5 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.• The microphones may be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the microphoneplacement examples that begin on page 3-37 to confirm that the microphones are appropri-ately positioned for the microphone check.• The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.The microphone level is more than 20dBbelow the highest microphone level.• Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-nected to the RV-5 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.• The microphones might be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the micro-phone placement examples that begin on page 3-37 to confirm that the microphones areappropriately positioned for the microphone check.• The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.The microphone level could not bedetermined because of excessive roomnoise in the listening space.• Eliminate extraneous noises in the listening space, including conversations, air conditionersand sounds that filter in through open doors and windows.• The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.(MICROPHONE)                    OK(MICROPHONE)          NOT DETECTED(MICROPHONE)        SIGNAL TOO LOW(MICROPHONE)          OUT OF RANGE(MICROPHONE)TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE
RV-5 Setup3-43When calibrating for a single listeningposition, place the microphones:3As close together as possible in a single listeningposition (the primary listening position)3At the approximate spot where the listener’s headwill be during listening3In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers3In a location unobstructed by furniture and otherfixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibrationnoise signals3At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers andwalls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakersThe illustration to the right provides an example ofproper microphone placement when calibrating for asingle listening position. The microphones arepositioned as close together as possible in a singlelistening position, allowing the RV-5 to calibrate optimalspeaker distances and output levels for that position.PROPER microphone placement to achieve the best results for a single listening positionFrontLeftCenterSubwooferFrontRightMicrophoneSideRightRearRightRearLeftSideLeft
Setup Lexicon3-44POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)When calibrating for multiple listeningpositions in a single row, position themicrophones:3At the approximate spot where the listener’s headwill be during listening3In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers3In a location unobstructed by furniture and otherfixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibrationnoise signals3At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers andwalls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakersThe illustration to the right provides an example ofproper microphone placement when calibrating formultiple listening positions in a single row. Each micro-phone is positioned in a single listening position within asingle row, allowing the RV-5 to calibrate optimalspeaker distances and output levels for that row at theexpense of a single listening position.PROPER microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in a single rowFrontLeftCenterSubwooferFrontRightMicrophoneSideRightRearRightRearLeftSideLeft
RV-5 Setup3-45When calibrating for multiple listeningpositions in multiple rows, position themicrophones:3At the approximate spot where the listener’s headwill be during listening3In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers3In a location unobstructed by furniture and otherfixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibrationnoise signals3At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers andwalls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakersThe illustration to the right provides an example ofproper microphone placement when calibrating formultiple listening positions in multiple rows. Each micro-phone is positioned in a single listening position within arow, allowing the RV-5 to calibrate optimal speakerdistances and output levels for a larger listening area atthe expense of a single listening position.PROPER microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in multiple rowsFrontLeftCenterSubwooferFrontRightMicrophoneSideRightRearRightRearLeftSideLeft
Setup Lexicon3-46POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)During the automatic calibration, do not:7Arrange the microphones along the perimeter ofthe listening positions or space7Position the microphones in spots where thelisteners’ heads will not be during listening7Obstruct the line-of-sight path between themicrophones and the speakers7Position the microphones on the floor, on seatcushions, or in locations obstructed by furnitureand other fixtures, where echoes might obscurecalibration noise signals7Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) ofspeakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)from any one speakerThe illustration to the right provides an example ofimproper microphone placement during the microphonecheck. The microphones are positioned on the flooralong the perimeter of the listening space, making itdifficult for the RV-5 to calibrate optimal speakerdistances and output levels for the actual listeningpositions.IMPROPER microphone positioning for automatic calibrationFrontLeftCenterSubwooferFrontRightMicrophoneSideRightRearRightRearLeftSideLeft
RV-5 Setup3-47During the automatic calibration, do not:7Arrange the microphones along the perimeter ofthe listening positions or space7Position the microphones at spots where thelisteners’ heads will not be during listening7Obstruct the line-of-sight path between themicrophones and the speakers7Position the microphones on the floor, on seatcushions, or in locations obstructed by furnitureand other fixtures, where echoes might obscurecalibration noise signals7Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) ofspeakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)from any one speakerThe illustration to the right provides an example ofimproper microphone placement during the microphonecheck. The microphones are positioned on seat cushionsrather than in spots where the listener’s heads will beduring listening.IMPROPER microphone positioning for automatic calibrationFrontLeftCenterSubwooferFrontRightMicrophoneSideRightRearRightRearLeftSideLeft
Setup Lexicon3-48PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION STEP DISTANCES DISTANCES & LEVELS LEVELS12AUTO SPEAKER SETUPSPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALCUSTOM SETUP40 Hz60 Hz60 Hz60 Hz40 HzOFFN/AAPARTAUTO SPEAKER SETUPDISTANCES & LEVELSSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGDISTANCESOUTPUT LEVELSPLACE MICROPHONESAROUND PREFERRED LISTENING POSITIONSCUSTOM SETUP40 Hz60 Hz60 Hz60 Hz40 HzOFFN/AAPARTAUTO SPEAKER SETUP!CAUTION!HIGH AUDIO LEVELSTEST WILL BEGIN IN10YOU WILL HAVE 10 SECTO LEAVE THE ROOM OR SIT QUIETLYPRESS     TO BEGINCOUNTDOWNPRESS    TO SKIPCOUNTDOWNFollow the procedures in the appropriate table column for the desired type of automatic calibration.MAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSLIVE! CALIBRATIONSETUPPOWER MANAGEMENTSelect the SPEAKER SETUP menu AUTOMATIC option, as shown in the menu illustration above.• If a microphone check is successful, the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu appears in the on-screen display. Pressthe or arrow button to highlight the automatic calibration option you want. Then press the arrow button to selectthis option. Refer to the table on page 3-35 for more information about automatic calibration options.• If a microphone check is unsuccessful, one of the error messages shown to the right appears in the on-screen display, indicat-ing that a successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration, and also the reason the previous check failed.If this occurs, go back to “Connecting the Microphones” on page 3-36 and work your way back to this page.MIC CHECK REQUIRED FOR AUTO CALIBRATIONNO MICROPHONEDETECTEDThe following AUTO SPEAKER SETUP messages are displayed before automatic calibration begins:• The !CAUTION! HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message indicates that the RV-5 generates loud calibration noise signals during automatic calibration. If the sig-nals become too loud, press the arrow button to cancel automatic calibration. Press the arrow button to open the next AUTO SPEAKER SETUPmenu.• The countdown display notifies you that automatic calibration will begin in 10 seconds. The primary reason for the 10 second delay is to give you timeto leave the listening space before automatic calibration begins. If you choose to remain in the room, your movements could affect the calibrationresults. If you leave the room, you can return in about 10 minutes (the calibration procedure should be completed). Press the arrow button toskip the countdown and begin automatic calibration. The RV-5 automatically activates automatic calibration when the countdown ends.
RV-5 Setup3-49STEP DISTANCES DISTANCES & LEVELS LEVELS3This step does not occur when the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS option is selected.4This step does not occur when the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu DISTANCES option is selected.CUSTOM SETUPSETTING DISTANCESFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ftCUSTOM SETUPSETTING DISTANCESFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER12.0ft10.5ft12.0ft4.5ftERROR6.0ft4.5ftN/ACUSTOM SETUPSETTING LEVELSFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER0.0dB0.0dB0.0dB0.0dB0.0dB0.0dB0.0dB0.0dBCUSTOM SETUPSETTING LEVELSFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER-2.0dBERROR-2.0dB-4.5dB-3.0dB-3.0dB-4.5dBN/AThe SETTING DISTANCES menu is displayed when the RV-5 calibrates speaker distances.• During speaker distance calibration, the RV-5 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zoneaudio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING DISTANCES menu. The cursor auto-matically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters, highlighting each parameterwhile the RV-5 calculates a distance for the corresponding speaker. As it finishes each parameter,the RV-5 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the parameter label.• Because of the way low-frequency signals propagate in most listening spaces, automatic speaker dis-tance calibration often produces unreliable results for subwoofers. For this reason, the RV-5 does notsend calibration noise signals to the Subwoofer connector during speaker distance calibration. Instead,the RV-5 automatically calibrates the subwoofer distance to the shortest distance of the other speakers.These distances can be manually adjusted. See “PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRA-TION” on page 3-54.The SETTING LEVELS menu is displayed when the RV-5 calibrates output levels.• During speaker levels calibration, the RV-5 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zoneaudio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING LEVELS menu. The cursor auto-matically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters, highlighting each parame-ter while the RV-5 calculates an output level for the corresponding speaker. As it finishes eachparameter, the RV-5 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the param-eter label.
Setup Lexicon3-50PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)STEP DISTANCES DISTANCES & LEVELS LEVELS5FRONT LEFTRefer to the table on page3-52 for information aboutall possible speaker calibra-tion messages.FRONT LEFTRefer to the table on page3-52 for information aboutall possible speaker calibra-tion messages.If there was a DISTANCES calibrationerror, an AUTO DISTANCES menu auto-matically displays. • A value indicates that no errors occurredduring the calibration procedure.• An ERROR message indicates that a valuewas calculated, but at least one erroroccurred during the calibration proce-dure.• Press the or arrow button to high-light the speaker calibration parameteryou want. Then press the button toview more detailed results for theselected speaker. A message similar tothe one shown above will display.• Refer to the table on page 3-52 for infor-mation about all possible speaker calibra-tion messages.• This menu is displayed, but not useraccessible during Auto Distance Calibra-tion or after Auto Calibration.When the RV-5 is finished calibratingspeaker distances and output levels, if therewas a calibration error, the AUTO SPEAKERSETUP screen is displayed, indicating theresults for each calibration procedure.• An OK message indicates that no errorsoccurred during the calibration proce-dure.• An ERROR message indicates that valueswere calculated, but at least one erroroccurred during calibration.• Press the or arrow button to high-light the desired calibration procedure. DISTANCES displays the AUTO DIS-TANCES screen shown in the left columnof this table.LEVELS displays the AUTO LEVELS screenshown in the right column of this table.• Press the arrow button to select thisprocedure.• Refer to the instructions in the appropri-ate column to view more detailed resultsfor each individual speaker.• If a speaker is highlighted in either theDistances or Levels menus, the speakername is displayed.If there was a LEVELS calibration error, anAUTO LEVELS menu automatically dis-plays.• A value indicates that no errors occurredduring the calibration procedure.• An ERROR message indicates that a valuewas calculated, but at least one erroroccurred during the calibration proce-dure.•Press theor arrow button to high-light the desired speaker calibrationparameter. Then, press the arrowbutton to view more detailed results forthe selected speaker. A message similarto the one shown above will display.• Refer to the table on page 3-52 for infor-mation about all possible speaker calibra-tion messages.• This menu is displayed, but not useraccessible during Auto Distance Calibra-tion or after Auto Calibration.AUTO SPEAKER SETUPDISTANCESLEVELSAUTO VALUES APPLIEDPRESS     TO  VIEWDETAILSOKERRORAUTO LEVELSFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER-2.0dBERROR-2.0dB-4.5dB-3.0dB-3.0dB-4.5dBN/AAUTO DISTANCESFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER12.0ft10.5ft12.0ft4.5ftERROR6.0ft4.5ftN/A
RV-5 Setup3-51STEP DISTANCES DISTANCES & LEVELS LEVELS6AUTO DISTANCES*FRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER12.0ft10.5ft12.0ft4.5ftERROR6.0ft4.5ftN/ASET DISTANCESUse the SET DISTANCES menu to selectthe desired speaker distances.1 Press the arrow button to return tothe SET DISTANCES menu.2 Press the or arrow button to tog-gle between calibrated speaker distances(AUTO) and original speaker distances.The speaker graphics at the bottom ofthe menu update to indicate the selectedvalues.3 Press the button to apply theselected values. A confirmation messageis displayed to indicate the applied val-ues.4 Press the button twice in successionto return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.The AUTO DISTANCES menu is only accessi-ble after the DISTANCES & LEVELS calibra-tion is performed as a combined procedure.Use the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu toselect speaker distances or levels.1 Press the arrow button to return to theAUTO SPEAKER SETUP results screen.2 To select the other calibration procedure,follow the instructions in Step 5. Otherwise,press the button to return to theSPEAKER SETUP menu.*Note: The AUTO DISTANCES screen is shownabove as an example. The AUTO LEVELSscreen can be substituted.Use the SET LEVELS menu to select thedesired speaker levels.1 Press the arrow button to return tothe SET LEVELS menu.•Press theand arrow buttons totoggle between calibrated output levels(AUTO) and original output levels. Thespeaker graphics at the bottom of themenu update to indicate the selectedvalues.•Press thearrow button to apply theselected values. A confirmation message isdisplayed to indicate the applied values.• Press the arrow button twice in suc-cession to return to the SPEAKER SETUPmenu.The AUTO LEVELS menu is only accessibleafter the DISTANCES & LEVELS calibration isperformed as a combined procedure.AUTO SPEAKER SETUPDISTANCESLEVELSAUTO VALUES APPLIEDPRESS     TO  VIEWDETAILSOKERRORAUTO LEVELSFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER-2.0dBERROR-2.0dB-4.5dB-3.0dB-3.0dB-4.5dBN/AAUTO DISTANCESFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER12.0ft10.5ft12.0ft4.5ftERROR6.0ft4.5ftN/AAUTO DISTANCESORIGINAL DISTANCESCR    SR                   RRL                      SL   RLMSUB0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ftSET LEVELSAUTO LEVELSORIGINAL LEVELSCR    SR                   RRL                      SL   RLMSUB0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB0.0dB0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB
Setup Lexicon3-52PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued) Message Description TroubleshootingThe RV-5 successfully calibrated the value for the selected speaker without error.•N/AThe selected speaker is not present in the speaker setup.• Set the corresponding CUSTOM or THX SETUP menu parameter to include the selectedspeaker in the speaker setup. (The RV-5 only calibrates values for speakers that are included inthe speaker setup.)The microphones detected out-of-phase calibration noise signals, but the cali-brated value is still accurate.• Examine speaker/associated amplifier connections to ensure that speaker wires are not crossed.• Dipolar speakers could cause this error. However, the RV-5 does not report this error unless atleast half of the microphones detect out-of-phase calibration noise signals.• Reflections from room objects could cause this error.• Drivers intentionally wired out-of-phase could cause this error.The microphones detected calibration noise signals at an unusually low level.• The microphones might be positioned more than 30 feet (9.14m) from the selected speaker or in alocation where echoes obscure calibration noise signals. Refer to the placement examples on pages3-40 to 3-44 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.• Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-nected to the RV-5 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.The microphones did not detect calibra-tion noise signals or the RV-5 could not calculate a value.• Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that themicrophones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.• Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-nected to the RV-5 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.One or more microphones did not detect calibration noise signals at a reasonable level. The calibrated value could be inac-curate.• Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that themicrophones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.The microphones detected calibration noise signals at an unusually high level.• Decrease associated amplifier volume levels – including (if applicable) powered subwoofer amplifiers.• The microphones may be positioned too close (within 2 feet [0.61m]) of the selected speaker.Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the micro-phones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.The microphones detected calibration noise signals at an unusually low level.• Increase associated amplifier volume levels – including (if applicable) powered subwoofer amplifiers.• The microphones may be positioned too far away (more than 30 feet [9.14m]) from theselected speaker. See the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirmthat the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.(SPEAKER)                    OK(SPEAKER)SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED(SPEAKER)SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE(SPEAKER)        SIGNAL TOO LOW(SPEAKER)UNABLE TO CALCULATE(SPEAKER)MAY NOT BE ACCURATE(SPEAKER)SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH(SPEAKER)SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW
RV-5 Setup3-53MANUAL CALIBRATIONSelecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu MANUAL option displays the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu, to manually calibrate speaker distances andoutput levels. The table below indicates available manual calibration options.Manual Options DetailsSPEAKER DISTANCES • Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of speaker distances.INTERNAL NOISE TEST • Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.• Automatically sends an internal calibration noise signal to each Main Zone audio output connector,allowing for simultaneous output level adjustment.EXTERNAL NOISE TEST • Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.• Requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.• Activates an appropriate listening mode based on the current Main Zone input source.BASS PEAK LIMITERS • Provides amplitude limits for low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connectorlabeled Subwoofer, and low-frequency signals redirected to other Main Zone audio output connectors.• Protects speakers against input sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks.SPEAKERSSETUP MANUALSPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALCUSTOM SETUP40 Hz60 Hz60 Hz60 Hz40 HzOFFN/AAPARTMANUAL SPEAKER SETUPSPEAKER DISTANCESLEVELS CALIBRATIONCR    SR                   RRL                      SL   RLMSUB0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB0.0dB0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dBSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSLIVE! CALIBRATIONSETUPPOWER MANAGEMENT
Setup Lexicon3-54PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRATIONSelecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER DISTANCES option displays the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu, to manually calibrate speakerdistances.To manually calibrate speaker distances:1. Follow the menu path shown above to select MANUAL SPEAKERSETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES. The SPEAKER DISTANCES menushown above will open in the on-screen display.2. Press the or  arrow buttons to highlight the desired speakerdistance parameter. Then, press the arrow button to select thehighlighted speaker distance parameter.3. To determine the appropriate speaker distance, measure thedistance between the primary listening position and the front ofthe speaker. For example, when the FRONT LEFT parameter is selected,measure the distance between the primary listening positionand the front of the front left speaker (connected to the MainZone audio output connector labeled Front L).4. When the speaker distance has been measured, press the and arrow buttons to set the parameter to the closest availablevalue.SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCESMANUAL SPEAKER SETUPSPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALSPEAKER DISTANCESLEVELS CALIBRATIONCR    SR                   RRL                      SL   RLMSUB0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ftSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGCUSTOM SETUPSPEAKER DISTANCESFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFERUNITS0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ftFEETMETERSFEET0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0mMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSLIVE! CALIBRATIONSETUPPOWER MANAGEMENT
RV-5 Setup3-55PERFORMING MANUAL OUTPUT LEVEL CALIBRATION Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS CALIBRATION option displays the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu shown below, to manuallycalibrate output levels.Note the following:• Use a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter to manually calibrateoutput levels. A SPL meter is a device that measures the relativeloudness of the speakers to ensure accurate output levelcalibration. SPL meters are available from electronic retailerssuch as Radio Shack.• Output levels should be calibrated from the primary listeningposition, placing the SPL meter at the approximate locationwhere the listener’s head will be during listening.• Output levels for speakers that are not included in the speakersetup cannot be adjusted during the internal noise test. Theseoutput levels can be adjusted during the external noise test, butthere is no need to do so.SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATIONMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSLIVE! CALIBRATIONSETUPINTERNAL NOISEMANUAL SPEAKER SETUPSPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALSPEAKER DISTANCESLEVELS CALIBRATIONCR    SR                   RRL                      SL   RLMSUB0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB0.0dB0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dBSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGCUSTOM SETUPLEVELS CALIBRATIONINTERNAL NOISE TESTCUSTOM SETUPSPEAKER LEVEL ADJUSTFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB-18.0 to +12.0dBEXTERNAL NOISE TESTBASS PEAK LIMITERS!CAUTION!HIGH AUDIO LEVELSPOWER MANAGEMENT
Setup Lexicon3-56INTERNAL NOISE TESTOpens the INTERNAL NOISE message shown on the previous page,which indicates that the internal noise test generates loud calibrationnoise signals.When the INTERNAL NOISE message opens:•Press thearrow button to open the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUSTmenu shown on the previous page. When the SPEAKER LEVELADJUST menu opens, the internal noise test automaticallybegins.•Press thebutton to skip the internal noise test.During the internal noise test, the RV-5 sends calibration noise signalsto each speaker in the order shown on the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUSTmenu. The cursor automatically scrolls through output level param-eters, highlighting each parameter as the RV-5 sends the calibrationnoise signal to the corresponding speaker. The calibration noisesignal is sent to each speaker for about 4 seconds.Note:When the internal noise test begins, the RV-5 automatically setsvolume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the master volume level whilethe test is in progress, to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).INTERNAL NOISE TEST LEVELS CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKERS SETUPTo manually calibrate output levels during the internal noise test:1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.2. Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position.3. Press the or arrow button to highlight the desired outputlevel parameter. Then, quickly press the button to select thisoutput level parameter. The horizontal bar graph shown on theprevious page will open in the on-screen display and automaticscrolling will stop.Note:During the internal noise test, it is possible to select an output levelparameter just as the cursor is about to automatically scroll to thenext parameter, causing the RV-5 to send the calibration noisesignal to both speakers. If this occurs, reselect the desired speaker.4. When the horizontal bar graph opens, press the or   buttonto select the output level that achieves a 75dB SPL meter readingfrom the primary listening position.5. Press   to close the parameter. The internal noise test willcontinue and automatic scrolling will resume.6. Repeat steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 until all desired output levels havebeen set.SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION INTERNAL NOISE TEST
RV-5 Setup3-57EXTERNAL NOISE TESTSelecting the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu EXTERNAL NOISE TESToption opens the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown on page 3-55,which manually calibrates output levels.The external noise test requires an external calibration source such asan audio calibration disc. When the external noise test is conducted,the RV-5 activates a listening mode based on the current Main Zoneinput source. Refer to the table below for more information aboutexternal noise test listening mode activation.When a listening mode is activated during the external noise test, allcustom listening mode menu parameter settings are ignored. Thelistening mode is applied to the current Main Zone input source in itsfactory-default condition. When the external noise test is finished, thelistening mode returns to its custom condition.EXTERNAL NOISE TEST LEVELS CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKERS SETUP*  These listening modes depend on the speaker configuration. Dolby Pro Logic IIx MOVIEwill only load when side and rear speakers are present.**These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source, speakersetup and parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions sectionbeginning on page 6-4 for more information.**If the Advanced Menu input is set to “ANALOG BYPASS OFF” the listening mode for theEXTERNAL NOISE TEST is “5.1a STANDARD”. Note:When the external noise test begins, the RV-5 automatically setsvolume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the master volume level whilethe test is in progress, to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).To manually calibrate output levels during the external noise test:1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.2. Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position.3. Press the   or    arrow button to highlight the output levelparameter you want. Then press the button to select thisoutput level parameter. The horizontal bar graph shown on page 3-55 is displayed.4. Begin playback of the external calibration source and press the or  arrow button to select the output level that achieves a 75dBSPL Meter reading.5. After selecting the output level, press the arrow button to closethe horizontal bar graph.6. Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 until you have set all the output levels youwant.SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION EXTERNAL NOISE TESTINPUT SOURCE  LISTENING MODE2-Channel PLII MOVIE,  PLIIx MOVIE*Dolby Digital DIGITAL**DTS(-ES) *5.1-Channel Analog 5.1a BYPASS***
Setup Lexicon3-58SETTING BASS PEAK LIMITERSThe BASS PEAK LIMITERS option displays the BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu, to set amplitude limits on low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors, including the Subwoofer. The RV-5 is equipped with an internal limiter to prevent low-frequency signals from exceeding a designated output level. This is essential for Dolby Digital and DTS(-ES) sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks at much higher output levels than 2-channel sources. In home theaters, there is a danger of the subwoofers and their associated amplifiers overloading when attempting to reproduce low-frequency signals. Note:Configure BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu parameter settings whetheroutput levels are automatically or manually calibrated.CAL NOISE  ON, OFFDetermines whether bass peak limiters are set with an internal orexternal calibration source. To set the CAL NOISE parameter:• Select ON to activate an internal calibration noise signal to setbass peak limiters.• Select OFF to deactivate the internal calibration noise signal. Setting bass peak limiters with the calibration noise set to OFF requiresan external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION BASS PEAK LIMITERSMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSLIVE! CALIBRATIONSETUPSPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALMANUAL SPEAKER SETUPSPEAKER DISTANCESLEVELS CALIBRATIONCR    SR                   RRL                      SL   RLMSUB0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB0.0dB0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dBSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGLEVELS CALIBRATIONINTERNAL NOISE TESTEXTERNAL NOISE TESTBASS PEAK LIMITERSBASS PEAK LIMITERCAL NOISELIMITERLIMIT ADJ!CAUTION!HIGH AUDIO LEVELSONON100dBONOFF75 to 120dBPOWER MANAGEMENTParameter Default Setting Possible SettingCAL NOISE  ON ON, OFFLIMITER ON ON, OFFLIMIT ADJ  100dB 75 to 120dBSPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION BASS PEAK LIMITERSCAL NOISE
RV-5 Setup3-59LIMITER  ON, OFFLimits low-frequency signals sent to the subwoofer or redirected toother speakers. To set the LIMITER parameter:•Select ON to restrict the output level of the low-frequencysignals to the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting. •Select OFF to allow an unrestricted signal output level,regardless of the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.LIMIT ADJ  75 to 120dBSets amplitude limits applied to the Subwoofer output connector,and to other Main Zone audio output connectors to which low-frequency signals are redirected. To set the LIMIT ADJ parameter:1. Select the LIMIT ADJ parameter.The parameter initially sets to 75dB. 2. Press the  and  arrow buttons to change the parameter value. The selected amplitude is applied when the SUB LIMITERparameter is set to ON.SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION BASS PEAK LIMITERSLIMITERSPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION BASS PEAK LIMITERS LIMITER ADJ
Setup Lexicon3-60I/O CONFIGThe I/O CONFIG option is used to configure the analog audio input connectors as eight (Left/Right) stereo connectors, five (Left/Right) stereoconnectors and one 5.1-channel configuration (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R), or as two stereo connectors and two 5.1-channelconfigurations.8 STEREO INPUTSSelect the 8 STEREO INPUTS option to configure the analog audioinput connectors as eight stereo connectors.When 8 STEREO INPUTS is selected:• All analog audio input connectors are configured as stereoconnectors.• The 5.1-channel connectors are not available.• Input sources that were assigned to the 5.1 ANLG (3-5) and 5.1ANLG (6-8) are reassigned to the stereo connectors labeled 3and 6, respectively.I/O CONFIGSETUPREAR PANEL CONFIG8 STEREO INPUTSOR5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLGOR2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLGSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSI/O CONFIGANALOG INPUTSAMP OUTPUTSLOCK OPTIONSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONPOWER MANAGEMENTI/O CONFIGSETUP 8 STEREO INPUTSANALOG INPUTS
RV-5 Setup3-615 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLGConfigures the analog audio input connectors as five stereoconnectors and one 5.1-channel configuration.When the analog audio input connectors are configured as fivestereo and one 5.1-channel configuration:• The connectors labeled 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are configured asstereo connectors.• The connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are configured as a 5.1-channelconnector. This connector is sent to the Main Zone audio outputconnectors, as indicated in the table at the bottom of the nextcolumn.• Two-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectorslabeled 6, 7 and 8 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connectorlabeled 5.1 ANLG (6-8). The 5.1-channel connectors should only beused with 5.1-channel analog sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLGConfigures the analog audio input connectors as two stereoconnectors and two 5.1-channel configurations.When the analog audio input connectors are configured as twostereo and two 5.1-channel connectors:• The connectors labeled 1 and 2 are configured as stereo connectors.• The connectors labeled 3, 4 and 5 are configured as a 5.1-channel connector, and the connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 areconfigured as a 5.1-channel connector. These connectors aresent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated inthe table at the bottom of this column.• 2-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectorslabeled 3, 4 and 5 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connectorlabeled 5.1 ANLG (3-5). Two-channel sources that were assignedto the stereo connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are reassigned to the5.1-channel connector labeled 5.1 ANLG (6-8). The 5.1-channelconnectors should only be used with 5.1-channel analogsources such as DVD-As and SACDs.The 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors are sent to the MainZone analog audio output connectors, as shown in the table below.I/O CONFIGSETUP 5 ST. &  (1) 5.1 ANLGANALOG INPUTSInput Connector Output Connector(L) Front L(R) Front R(C) Center(SUB) Sub(LS) Side L and Rear L(RS) Side R and Rear RI/O CONFIGSETUP 2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLGANALOG INPUTS
Setup Lexicon3-62I/O CONFIG (continued)MAIN 7.1When set to MAIN 7.1, all of the amplifier outputs on the rear panelwill be configured for use in the Main Zone. Outputs 3 and 7 areused for the rear speakers (Rear L/R).MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 2. Outputs 1, 2,4, 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone. The inputsource selected for Zone 2 will be output on amplifier outputs 3 and 7.Note:If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers, a warningmessage will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers willbe disabled for the Main Zone when the 5.1 MAIN & ZONE2 2.0 settingis chosen. Press the right menu button to confirm the change. Pressingany other button will cancel the change.MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 3. Outputs 1, 2,4, 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone. The inputsource selected for Zone 3 will be output on amplifier outputs 3 and 7.Note:If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers, a warningmessage will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers willbe disabled for the Main Zone when the 5.1 MAIN & ZONE3 2.0 settingis chosen. Press the right menu button to confirm the change. Pressingany other button will cancel the change.AMP OUTPUTSMAIN 7.1MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0SETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSI/O CONFIGANALOG INPUTSAMP OUTPUTSLOCK OPTIONSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONPOWER MANAGEMENTI/O CONFIGSETUP MAIN 7.1AMP INPUTSI/O CONFIGSETUP MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0AMP INPUTSI/O CONFIGSETUP MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0AMP INPUTS
RV-5 Setup3-63DISPLAY SETUPSelecting the SETUP menu DISPLAYS option opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the on-screen and front-panel displays,restore audio/video synchronization, and activate and create a custom unit name.DISPLAYSSETUPDISPLAY SETUPON-SCREEN DISPLAYFRONT PANEL DISPLAYA/V SYNC DELAYOFF, 1 to 60msCUSTOM NAMEEDIT CUSTOM NAMEOFFOFFSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSLOCK OPTIONSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONPOWER MANAGEMENTParameter  Default Setting Possible SettingON-SCREEN DISPLAY  Refer to page 3-64FRONT PANEL DISPLAY Refer to page 3-66A/V SYNC DELAY  OFF  OFF, 1 to 60msCUSTOM NAME OFF ON, OFFEDIT CUSTOM NAME N/A N/A
Setup Lexicon3-64ON-SCREEN DISPLAY SETUPOpens the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu, which is used to customize the on-screen display.STATUS ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFFActivates and deactivates the on-screen display sent to the Main Zonevideo output connector. When set to ALWAYS ON, the on-screen displayremains on at all times. When set to 2 SECONDS, the on-screen displayappears for 2 seconds whenever the input source changes or the RV-5receives a command. When set to ALWAYS OFF, the on-screen displayremains off at all times. It will not reappear until the ON-SCREENDISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.Note:When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYSOFF, the on-screen display immediately disappears. Use the front-paneldisplay as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.DISPLAYSSETUP ON-SCREEN DISPLAYALWAYS ON2 SECONDSALWAYS OFFTOPCENTERBOTTOMSECAMPALNTSCDISPLAY SETUPON-SCREEN DISPLAYFRONT PANEL DISPLAYA/V SYNC DELAYCUSTOM NAMEEDIT CUSTOM NAMEOFFOFFONOFFON-SCREEN DISPLAYSTATUSPOSITIONFORMATBACKGROUND2 SECONDSTOPNTSCONSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSLOCK OPTIONSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONPOWER MANAGEMENTParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsSTATUS 2 SECONDS ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFFPOSITION TOP TOP, CENTER, BOTTOMFORMAT NTSC SECAM, PAL, NTSCBACKGROUND ON ON, OFFDISPLAYSSETUP ON-SCREEN DISPLAY STATUS
RV-5 Setup3-65POSITION TOP, CENTER, BOTTOMControls the vertical position of the two-line status on the displaydevice screen. When set to TOP, the two-line status appears near thetop of the display device screen. When set to CENTER, the two-linestatus is centered on the display device screen. When set toBOTTOM, the two-line status appears near the bottom of the displaydevice screen. Refer to page 2-28 for more information about thetwo-line status.FORMAT SECAM, PAL, NTSCControls the compatibility between the video input connectors, thevideo switcher and the display device. Select the setting that iscompatible with the source components and display device.Note:The FORMAT parameter affects the composite and S-Video outputconnectors. It does not affect the component video output connector.BACKGROUND ON, OFFActivates and deactivates the menu background. When set to ON,on-screen display menus appear over a solid blue or gray background(depending on the display device). When set to OFF, on-screendisplay menus appear over the video input signal.Note:When the BACKGROUND parameter is set to OFF, the on-screen displaywill disappear if the display device is using the component video outputconnector.DISPLAYSSETUP ON-SCREEN DISPLAY POSITIONDISPLAYSSETUP ON-SCREEN DISPLAY FORMATDISPLAYSSETUP ON-SCREEN DISPLAY BACKGROUND
Setup Lexicon3-66FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY SETUPOpens the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu, which is used to customize the front-panel display.STATUS ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFFActivates and deactivates the front-panel display. When set to ALWAYSON, the front-panel display remains on at all times. When set to 2SECONDS, the front-panel display appears for 2 seconds whenever theinput source changes or the RV-5 receives a command. When set toALWAYS OFF, the front-panel display remains off at all times.Note:When the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set toALWAYS OFF, the front-panel display immediately disappears. Use the on-screen display as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2SECONDS.BRIGHTNESS 100%,75%, 50%, 25%Controls the brightness of front-panel display characters. When asetting is selected, front-panel display illumination automaticallyadjusts to the selected brightness.ALWAYS ON2 SECONDSALWAYS OFFDISPLAY SETUPON-SCREEN DISPLAYFRONT PANEL DISPLAYA/V SYNC DELAYCUSTOM NAMEEDIT CUSTOM NAMEOFFOFF100%FRONT PANEL DISPLAYSTATUSBRIGHTNESSALWAYS ON100%75%50%25%SETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSLOCK OPTIONSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONPOWER MANAGEMENTParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsSTATUS ALWAYS ON ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFFBRIGHTNESS 100% 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%DISPLAYSSETUP FRONT PANEL DISPLAY STATUS DISPLAYSSETUP FRONT PANEL DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS
RV-5 Setup3-67A/V SYNC DELAY OFF, 1 to 60msRestores audio/video synchronization when using products such asvideo processors that introduce a video signal delay. This parametercan be used to set an audio signal delay to compensate for the videosignal delay.CUSTOM NAME  ON, OFFActivates the display of a custom unit name, which appears when theRV-5 is activated. When set to ON, the custom name scrolls acrossthe on-screen and front-panel displays when the RV-5 is activated.When set to OFF, the custom name does not appear when the RV-5 isactivated. The custom name can be entered in the DISPLAY SETUPmenu EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu.EDIT CUSTOM NAME  Opens the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu shown below, which can beused to create a custom unit name. When the CUSTOM parameter isset to ON, the custom unit name appears in the on-screen and front-panel displays when the RV-5 is activated.To customize the name of the RV-5:1. Follow the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu path to open the EDITCUSTOM NAME drop-down menu shown below.2. When the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu opens, pressthe remote control  and  arrow buttons to change thecharacter above the cursor (^).3. When the desired character has been selected, press the  arrowbutton to advance to the next character space. The cursor willautomatically wrap to the first character space when the lastcharacter space is passed.4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the desired custom unit name.5. When the desired custom unit name has been entered, press the arrow button to close the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-downmenu and return to the DISPLAY SETUP menu.DISPLAYSSETUP A/V SYNC DELAYDISPLAY SETUPON-SCREEN DISPLAYFRONT PANEL DISPLAYA/V SYNC DELAYOFF, 1 to 60msCUSTOM NAMEEDIT CUSTOM NAMEOFFOFF ONOFF EDIT CUSTOM NAMERV-5      BUTTONS TO EDITUP TO 20 CHARACTERS    BUTTON TO ADVANCE>SETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSLOCK OPTIONSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONPOWER MANAGEMENTDISPLAYSSETUP CUSTOM NAMEDISPLAYSSETUP EDIT CUSTOM NAME
Setup Lexicon3-68VOLUME CONTROL SETUPOpens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which is used to configure Main Zone, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Headphone volume levels.MAIN PWR ON LAST LVL, –80 to +12dBSets the Main Zone volume level that will be selected whenever theMain Zone is activated. When set to LAST LVL, the Main Zoneactivates at the volume level that was last selected in the previousoperating session.MUTE LEVEL –40dB, –30dB, –20dB, –10dB, FULL MUTESets the amount of attenuation that occurs in the Main Zone when thefront-panel or remote control Mute button is pressed. When set to FULLMUTE, Main Zone volume level will be fully attenuated. Otherwise, MainZone volume level will be attenuated to the selected level.Z2 PWR ON LAST LVL, –80 to +12dBSets the Zone 2 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 2 isactivated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 2 activates at the volume levelthat was last selected in the previous operating session. LAST LVL isdisplayed on power up if the Zone 2 was powered off using the Zone2 Off button on the remote control or front panel.SETUP VOLUME CONTROLSMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPVOLUME CONTROL SETUPMAIN PWR ONMUTE LEVELZ2 PWR ONLAST LVL, -80 to +12dB-30dB-30dB-30dB-10dB-20dB-30dB-40dBFULL MUTELOCK OPTIONSZ2 PWR ON -30dBVOLUME CONTROL SETUPMAIN PWR ONMUTE LEVELZONE PWR ON-30dB-30dB-30dBMAX VOL +12dBSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONHEADPHONE -30dBVOLUME CONTROL SETUPMAIN PWR ONMUTE LEVELZ2 PWR ON-30dB-30dB-30dBZ2 PWR ON -30dBHEADPHONE -30dBMAX VOLUME +12dB MAX VOLUME +12dBPOWER MANAGEMENTParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsMAIN PWR ON –30dB LAST LVL, –80 to +12dBMUTE LEVEL –30dB –40dB, –30dB, –20dB, –10dB, FULLZ2 PWR ON –30dB LAST LVL, –80 to +12dBZ3 PWR ON –30dB LAST LVL, –80 to +12dBHEADPHONE –30dB LAST LVL, –80 to +12dBMAX VOLUME –12dB –80 to +12dBSETUP VOLUME CONTROLS MAIN PWR ONSETUP VOLUME CONTROLS MUTE LEVELSETUP VOLUME CONTROLS ZONE PWR ON
RV-5 Setup3-69Z3 PWR ON LAST LVL, –80 to +12dBSets the Zone 3 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 3 isactivated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 3 activates at the volume levelthat was last selected in the previous operating session. LAST LVL isdisplayed on power up if the Zone 3 was powered off using the Zone3 Off button on the remote control or front panel.HEADPHONE LAST LVL, –80 to +12dBSets the Headphone volume level that will be selected wheneverheadphones are plugged in to the RV-5. When set to LAST LVL, theheadphones will activate at the last volume level that was selectedwhen they were last plugged in. When the headphones areunplugged, the volume will revert to the MAIN PWR ON setting.MAX VOLUME  -80 TO +12dBSelects the maximum volume level for the Main Zone. When a valueis selected, the RV-5 automatically sets Main Zone volume level to theselected value when the current level is higher.SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS ZONE PWR ONSETUP VOLUME CONTROLS ZONE PWR ONSETUP VOLUME CONTROLS MAX VOLUME
Setup Lexicon3-70TRIGGER SETUPSelecting the SETUP menu TRIGGER option opens theTRIGGER SETUP menu shown to the right, which can be usedto configure the trigger output connector labeled 1. The RV-5rear panel houses two 12V DC trigger output connectors. Theconnector labeled PWR – the power trigger output connector– is not configurable. It is activated when the RV-5 is activated,and deactivated when the RV-5 is deactivated. The triggeroutput connector labeled 1 can be configured for remote orprogram operation.REMOTE ONLY  ON, OFFConfigures the trigger output connector labeled 1 for remoteoperation. When set to ON, this connector is configured forremote operation. The remote control play and stop buttonsturns the trigger on and off. The RV-5 ignores all otherTRIGGER SETUP menu parameter settings. When set to OFF,the trigger output connector labeled 1 is not configured forremote operation. It can be configured for program operation. Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsREMOTE ONLY ON ON, OFFProgram Operation OFF ON, OFFTRIGGERSETUPMAIN MENU SETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPONOFF* TRIGGER SETUP menulistening mode namesare fixed, meaningthese names do notchange when certainencoding is present. Forinstance, the 5.1 THXSurEX listening modelabel appears whetherTHX Ultra2, THX Sur-round EX, or no encod-ing is engaged.LOCK OPTIONSTRIGGER SETUPOFFMUSIC OFFOFF2-CHAN OFF5.1a  FILM OFF5.1a  MUSIC OFF5.1a  SurEX OFF5.1a  MUSIC OFF5.1a STANDARD OFF5.1a 2-CHANNEL OFF5.1a BYPASS OFF2CH BYPASS OFFHEADPHONE OFFHEADPHONE 5.1 OFFHEADPHONE OFFHEADPHONE 5.1a OFFLIVE! SMALL OFFLIVE! MED OFFLIVE! LARGE OFFTRIGGER SETUPREMOTE ONLY ONDVD1 OFFDVD2 OFFSAT OFFVCR OFFTV OFFCD OFFTUNER OFFPHONO OFFZONE2 INPUTS OFFZONE3 INPUTS OFFFILM OFFTV OFFMUSIC OFFMUSIC SURR OFFPLIIx + THX OFFPLIIx MOV OFFPLIIx MUS OFFPLII+ THX OFFPLII MOVIE OFFPLII MUSIC OFFPL + THX OFFPRO LOGIC OFF+ THX OFFCIN OFFMUSIC OFFNIGHTCLUB OFFCONCERT HHALL OFFCHURCH OFFCATHEDRAL OFFPANORAMA OFF2-CH SURROUND OFF2-CHANNEL OFFMONO LOGIC OFFMONO SURROUND OFFMONO OFF5.1 FILM OFF5.1 TV OFF5.1 MUSIC OFFSurEX OFFMUSIC OFF5.1 PLIIx MOV OFF5.1 PLIIx MUS OFFDIGITAL EX OFF5.1 2-CHANNEL OFF5.1 MONO LOGIC OFF5.1 MONO SURR OFF5.1 MONO OFFFILM OFFMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONPOWER MANAGEMENTTRIGGERSETUP REMOTE ONLY
RV-5 Setup3-71PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETERS ON, OFFConfigure the trigger output connector labeled 1 forprogram operation. All TRIGGER SETUP menu parameters–except the REMOTE ONLY parameter–are consideredprogram operation parameters. The connector can beassociated with multiple inputs and listening modes at thesame time.When the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF andprogram operation parameters are set to ON, the triggeroutput connector labeled 1 is associated with the corre-sponding Main Zone inputs, Main Zone listening modesor Zone 2 inputs. (The connector cannot be associatedwith individual Zone 2 inputs; rather, it can be associatedwith the Zone 2 inputs as a group.) When configured forprogram operation, the connector is activated when thecorresponding inputs and listening modes are selectedand deactivated when the corresponding inputs andlistening modes are deselected.Note:When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected torestore the factory default version of the selected listeningmode, the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listeningmode parameter is automatically set to OFF.TRIGGERSETUP (PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETER)MAIN MENU SETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPONOFF* TRIGGER SETUP menulistening mode namesare fixed, meaningthese names do notchange when certainencoding is present. Forinstance, the 5.1 THXSurEX listening modelabel appears whetherTHX Ultra2, THX Sur-round EX, or no encod-ing is engaged.LOCK OPTIONSTRIGGER SETUPOFFMUSIC OFFOFF2-CHAN OFF5.1a  FILM OFF5.1a  MUSIC OFF5.1a  SurEX OFF5.1a  MUSIC OFF5.1a STANDARD OFF5.1a 2-CHANNEL OFF5.1a BYPASS OFF2CH BYPASS OFFHEADPHONE OFFHEADPHONE 5.1 OFFHEADPHONE OFFHEADPHONE 5.1a OFFLIVE! SMALL OFFLIVE! MED OFFLIVE! LARGE OFFTRIGGER SETUPREMOTE ONLY ONDVD1 OFFDVD2 OFFSAT OFFVCR OFFTV OFFCD OFFTUNER OFFPHONO OFFZONE2 INPUTS OFFZONE3 INPUTS OFFFILM OFFTV OFFMUSIC OFFMUSIC SURR OFFPLIIx + THX OFFPLIIx MOV OFFPLIIx MUS OFFPLII+ THX OFFPLII MOVIE OFFPLII MUSIC OFFPL + THX OFFPRO LOGIC OFF+ THX OFFCIN OFFMUSIC OFFNIGHTCLUB OFFCONCERT HHALL OFFCHURCH OFFCATHEDRAL OFFPANORAMA OFF2-CH SURROUND OFF2-CHANNEL OFFMONO LOGIC OFFMONO SURROUND OFFMONO OFF5.1 FILM OFF5.1 TV OFF5.1 MUSIC OFFSurEX OFFMUSIC OFF5.1 PLIIx MOV OFF5.1 PLIIx MUS OFFDIGITAL EX OFF5.1 2-CHANNEL OFF5.1 MONO LOGIC OFF5.1 MONO SURR OFF5.1 MONO OFFFILM OFFMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONPOWER MANAGEMENT
Setup Lexicon3-72TUNER SETUPSelecting the SETUP menu TUNER SETUP option opens the TUNER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the AM/FM radio tuner.REGION USA, EUROPE, JAPAN, E. EURSets the tuner region. The four regions are USA, EUROPE, JAPAN andE. EUR. The table on the next page lists the band limits and incre-ments for these regions.Note:The tuner user interface will not allow illegal frequencies to be entered. Itwill always set at the closest valid frequency. For example, if the RV-5 hasUSA set as the current region, entering 107.8MHz will result in 107.9MHzbeing the actual tuner frequency. If the value is less than the lowestfrequency, it will set it to LO LIMIT for the appropriate region. Likewise, ifthe dialed value is larger than the highest allowed frequency, it willactually set it to the HI LIMIT for the appropriate region.SETUP TUNER SETUPMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPTUNER SETUPREGIONSCAN SENSAUTOLOADUSALOWLOCK OPTIONSCLEAR ALLSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONUSAEUROPEJAPANE. EURTUNER PRESETSDISPLAYRADIO TEXT SCROLL RATEAUTO FREQUENCYRDS NAMEONMEDIUMONPOWER MANAGEMENTParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsREGION USA USA, EUROPE, JAPAN, E. EURSCAN SENS LOW LOW, MED, HIGHAUTOLOAD N/A N/ACLEAR ALL N/A N/ATUNER PRESETS N/A N/ADISPLAY RDS NAME RDS NAME, PRESET NAME, FREQUENCYRADIO TEXT ON ON, OFFSCROLL RATE MEDIUM SLOW, MEDIUM, FASTAUTO FREQUENCY ON ON, OFFSETUP TUNER SETUP REGION
RV-5 Setup3-73SCAN SENS LOW, MED, HIGHSelects the Scan Sensitivity parameter, which can be used to set thethreshold the system will use to tune to a new station. The defaultsetting is LOW sensitivity (only the strongest station frequencies willtune). If the LOW setting does not tune enough stations, try the MED(medium) or HIGH settings.TUNER REGION BAND LIMIT AND INCREMENTSMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPTUNER SETUPREGIONSCAN SENSAUTOLOADUSALOWLOCK OPTIONSCLEAR ALLSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONLOWMEDHIGHTUNER PRESETSDISPLAYRADIO TEXT SCROLL RATEAUTO FREQUENCYRDS NAMEONMEDIUMONPOWER MANAGEMENTSETUP TUNER SETUP REGION REGION FM LO LIMIT FM HI LIMIT FM INCREMENT AM LO LIMIT AM HI LIMIT AM INCREMENTUSA 87.90MHZ 107.90MHZ 200 KHZ/.2MHZ 520KHZ 1720KHZ 10KHZEUROPE 87.50MHZ 108.00MHZ 50KHZ/.05MHZ 520KHZ 1602KHZ 9KHZJAPAN 76.00MHZ 91.00MHZ 50KHZ/.05MHZ 522KHZ 1720KHZ 9KHZE. EUR 64.00MHZ 76.00MHZ 50KHZ/.05MHZ 520KHZ 1720KHZ 9KHZ
Setup Lexicon3-74TUNER SETUP (continued)AUTOLOADAutomatically scans and stores presets for the currently selectedfrequency band. To select the AUTOLOAD option, highlight AUTOLOAD in the TUNERSETUP menu and press the right () arrow. The message “PRESSRIGHT TO START AUTOLOAD” appears in the on-screen and front-panel displays. • To cancel the AUTOLOAD command, press the left () arrow.• AUTOLOAD skips presets with previously stored values and usesthe next available preset. • Once all available stations have been scanned, or if any TUNERbutton is pressed (including the remote’s buttons), AUTOLOADwill stop. • To autoload stations from the other frequency band, select thatband and restart AUTOLOAD.Note:Presets are saved when the unit is powered down. Because theAUTOLOAD function preserves any existing presets, consider using theCLEAR ALL function before using AUTOLOAD. Note that some channelsmay be repeated in the preset section if AUTOLOAD is used more thanonce since the last CLEAR ALL.PRESS RIGHT JTO START AUTOLOADMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPTUNER SETUPREGIONSCAN SENSAUTOLOADUSALOWLOCK OPTIONSCLEAR ALLSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONTUNER PRESETSDISPLAYRADIO TEXT SCROLL RATEAUTO FREQUENCYRDS NAMEONMEDIUMONPOWER MANAGEMENTSETUP TUNER SETUP AUTOLOAD
RV-5 Setup3-75CLEAR ALLClears all of the presets. When this option is highlighted, press theright () arrow to select. The message “PRESS RIGHT  TO CLEARALL PRESETS” will appear in the on-screen and front-panel displays.(Press the left () arrow to cancel the CLEAR ALL command.) This should be used after all presets have been entered but it isdesired to rescan in order to obtain new presets. For example, if youhave moved to a new city, it would be necessary to clear all existingpresets and scan for local stations.TUNER PRESETSThis selection provides an alternative access point to the TUNERPRESETS menu. For more information, see “Tuner Presets” onpage 5-2.SETUP TUNER SETUP CLEAR ALLPRESS RIGHT JTO CLEAR ALL PRESETSMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPTUNER SETUPREGIONSCAN SENSAUTOLOADUSALOWLOCK OPTIONSCLEAR ALLSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONTUNER PRESETSDISPLAYRADIO TEXT SCROLL RATEAUTO FREQUENCYRDS NAMEONMEDIUMONPOWER MANAGEMENTSETUP TUNER SETUP TUNER PRESETSMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPTUNER SETUPREGIONSCAN SENSAUTOLOADUSALOWLOCK OPTIONSCLEAR ALLSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONTUNER PRESETSDISPLAYRADIO TEXT SCROLL RATEAUTO FREQUENCYRDS NAMEONMEDIUMONPOWER MANAGEMENT
Setup Lexicon3-76TUNER SETUP (continued)DISPLAY RDS NAME, PRESET NAME, FREQUENCYIdentifies the current channel setting, in the top right corner of theOSD and front panel display. There are three possible selections: RDSNAME, PRESET NAME, and FREQUENCY. The default setting is RDSNAME. PRESET NAME displays the name given to the preset frequency of thecurrently selected channel. If the current channel is not a tunerpreset, then the channel frequency will be displayed.RDS NAME displays the station's Program Service (PS) name, which isintended to be used to identify a station or station program. If theRDS information is not available, then the channel frequency will bedisplayed.FREQUENCY displays the actual frequency value of the channelselected.Note:In the US, some stations broadcast other information in place of theProgram Service (PS) name, such as a text messaging feature similar toRadio Text (RT). This can make it difficult to identify the station. You maywish to select PRESET NAME instead of an RSD NAME in this instance.RDS NAMEPRESET NAMEFREQUENCYMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPTUNER SETUPREGIONSCAN SENSAUTOLOADUSALOWLOCK OPTIONSCLEAR ALLSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONTUNER PRESETSDISPLAYRADIO TEXT SCROLL RATEAUTO FREQUENCYRDS NAMEONMEDIUMONPOWER MANAGEMENTSETUP TUNER SETUP DISPLAY
RV-5 Setup3-77RADIO TEXT ON, OFFActivates the RADIO TEXT (RT) feature. Radio Text is presented asscrolling text in the bottom row of the front-panel and on-screendisplays. Radio text can contain up to 64 characters and whatevertext the station broadcasts - such as the title and performer of thecurrent song, the station call letters or the station byline. Not allstations broadcast RT. When tuned to a station that broadcasts RadioText, it will take approximately ten seconds to display the text.When Radio Text is active, additional information is displayed in thescrolling text. After the RT from the radio station has finishedscrolling, double asterisks (**) are displayed, followed by the currentlyset listening mode, volume level, and tuner frequency. A second setof double asterisks identifies the end of the tuner information and thebeginning repeat of the station's Radio Text.SCROLL RATE SLOW, MEDIUM, FASTControls the scrolling speed of the Radio Text. The default setting isMEDIUM. For faster text scrolling, select FAST. For slower textscrolling, select SLOW.SETUP TUNER SETUP RADIO TEXTONOFFMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPTUNER SETUPREGIONSCAN SENSAUTOLOADUSALOWLOCK OPTIONSCLEAR ALLSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONTUNER PRESETSDISPLAYRADIO TEXT SCROLL RATEAUTO FREQUENCYRDS NAMEONMEDIUMONPOWER MANAGEMENTSETUP TUNER SETUP SCROLL RATESLOWMEDIUMFASTMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPTUNER SETUPREGIONSCAN SENSAUTOLOADUSALOWLOCK OPTIONSCLEAR ALLSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONTUNER PRESETSDISPLAYRADIO TEXT SCROLL RATEAUTO FREQUENCYRDS NAMEONMEDIUMONPOWER MANAGEMENT
Setup Lexicon3-78TUNER SETUP (continued)AUTO FREQUENCY ON, OFFChecks for alternate frequency broadcasts in case of station drop outor signal fade. The default setting is ON. Many radio stationsbroadcast on several frequencies simultaneously. When active, AUTOFREQUENCY checks for these alternate frequency broadcasts whensignal failure is detected. If the main frequency drops out and AUTO FREQUENCY is activated,the volume will mute briefly until the alternate broadcast is received. AUTO FREQUENCY will only switch to a new frequency whenthe following conditions are met:• The main frequency signal starts to fade.• The channel identification of the alternate frequency is an exactmatch of the currently selected frequency.• The alternate frequency detected has a stronger signal strengththan the currently selected frequency.• The AUTO FREQUENCY feature is ON.ONOFFMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPTUNER SETUPREGIONSCAN SENSAUTOLOADUSALOWLOCK OPTIONSCLEAR ALLSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONTUNER PRESETSDISPLAYRADIO TEXT SCROLL RATEAUTO FREQUENCYRDS NAMEONMEDIUMONPOWER MANAGEMENTSETUP TUNER SETUP AUTO FREQUENCY
RV-5 Setup3-79LOCK OPTIONSSelecting the SETUP menu LOCK OPTIONS option opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which is used to protect MODE ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLSand SETUP menu branch parameter settings from accidental changes.MODES  LOCKED, UNLOCKEDControls MODE ADJUST menu branch settings, which includes all lis-tening mode menu settings. When set to LOCKED, these settings cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settings can be adjusted.AUDIO CNTRL  LOCKED, UNLOCKEDControls AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings. When set toLOCKED, these settings cannot be adjusted. When set toUNLOCKED, these settings can be adjusted.SETUP  LOCKED, UNLOCKEDControls SETUP menu branch settings. When set to LOCKED, thesesettings cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settingscan be adjusted.SETUP LOCK OPTIONSLOCK OPTIONSMODESAUDIO CNTRLSETUPUNLOCKEDUNLOCKEDUNLOCKEDLOCKEDUNLOCKEDMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATIONPOWER MANAGEMENTParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsMODES UNLOCKED LOCKED, UNLOCKEDAUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED LOCKED, UNLOCKEDSETUP UNLOCKED LOCKED, UNLOCKEDSETUP LOCK OPTIONS MODESSETUP LOCK OPTIONS AUDIO CNTRLSETUP LOCK OPTIONS SETUP
Setup Lexicon3-80
4Audio & Video ControlsAudio Controls............................................................................4-2
Audio & Video Controls Lexicon4-2AUDIO CONTROLSSelecting AUDIO CONTROLS opens the AUDIO CONTROLS menu, which is used to customize the audio output connectors.EQ PRESET PRESET 1, PRESET 2, PRESET 3, ACTIVE PSThe RV-5 provides 3 preset controls for the EQ plus one user-controlled setting.TONE CONTROLS OFF, ONActives or deactivates the tone controls.BASS –0.5dB to +5.0dBControls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and Subwoofer. The BASS Parameter Settings graph on the next page indicates the frequency response of all BASS parameter settings. Bass setting can be changed in 2dB increments.TREBLE –5.0dB to +5.0dBControls the amount of high-frequency boost or cut applied to theaudio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center. The TREBLEParameter Settings graph on the next page indicates the frequencyresponse of all TREBLE parameter settings. Treble setting can bechanged in 2dB increments.MAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSAUDIO CONTROLSEQ PRESETTONE CONTROLSBASSTREBLEAUDIO STATUS+0.0dB+0.0dBOFFONOFF-5.0 to +5.0dB -5.0 to +5.0dBSETUPPRESET 1: BYPASSPRESET 2: BYPASSPRESET 3: BYPASSACTIVE PS: USEREQ PRESETAUDIO CONTROLS EQ PRESETAUDIO CONTROLS TONE CONTROLSAUDIO CONTROLS BASSAUDIO CONTROLS TREBLE
RV-5 Audio & Video Controls4-3The BASS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub.BASS Parameter SettingsThe TREBLE parameter controls the amount of high-frequency boost or cut applied to the audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.TREBLE Parameter Settings
Audio & Video Controls Lexicon4-4AUDIO CONTROLS (continued)AUDIO STATUS  The AUDIO STATUS menu is an information-only menu identifyingthe current audio status of the RV-5 unit. Input identifies the actualaudio source. Name identifies the title of the RV-5 as defined by theuser. Connector identifies the actual audio input port selected onthe rear panel. Audio identifies the audio input selected in thecontrol panel. Listen Mode identifies the currently selectedsurround mode. Type identifies the currently selected surroundtype.MAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSAUDIO CONTROLSEQ PRESETTONE CONTROLSBASSTREBLEAUDIO STATUS+0.0dB+0.0dBOFFSETUPINPUT:NAME:CONNECTOR:AUDIO:AUDIO STATUSLISTEN TYPE:TYPE:DVD 1HDMI 2UNLOCKSTEREO2-CHANNELAUDIO CONTROLS AUDIO STATUS
RV-5 Audio & Video Controls4-5VIDEO CONTROLSSelecting VIDEO CONTROLS opens the VIDEO CONTROLS menu, which is used to customize the video connectors.4:3 IN > 16:9 DISP ORIGINAL, AUTO, STRETCH 2, 2.35 LB  STRETCH, 2.35 LB ZOOM, STRETCH, LB ZOOMIdentifies the display settings.VIDEO STATUS  The VIDEO STATUS menu is an information-only menu identifyingthe current video status of the RV-5 unit. Input Resol. identifies thecurrent input resolution setting. Copy Protection identifies thecurrent status of the copy protection mode. Video Process identifiesthe current setting of the video processor. Output Resol. identifiesthe current output resolution setting. Component Out identifies thecurrently selected component output type. S-Video Out identifiesthe currently selected S-video output type. Composite Outidentifies the currently selected composite output type. MAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLS4:3 IN > 16:9 DISP:ORIGINALVIDEO STATUSSETUPAUTOSTRETCH 22.35 LB STRETCH2.35 LB ZOOMORIGINALINPUT RESOL:COPY PROTECTION:VIDEO PROCESS:OUTPUT RESOL:VIDEO STATUSCOMPONENT OUT:S-VIDEO OUT:- - -BYPASS- - -480iOFFCOMPOSITE OUT:OFFOFFSTRETCHLB ZOOMAUDIO CONTROLS EQ PRESETAUDIO CONTROLS VIDEO STATUS
Audio & Video Controls Lexicon4-6
5Tuner PresetsTuner Presets ..............................................................................5-2
Tuner Presets Lexicon5-2TUNER PRESETSSelecting TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU displays a list of the pages of existing presets. The preset number, preset name (if available),frequency and broadcast band is displayed.In the US, each preset channel is identified by the station's callletters, or what their broadcast information identifies as the callletters. In Europe and Japan, each preset channel is identified by thestation's Program Service (PS) name. If RDS information is notavailable, then the Preset name will be Preset XX, where XX is thelisted number location in the Preset menu for that position. Forexample, if Preset #01 is FM 90.90 and the call letters are WABC,then the name for that position is WABC.To edit a preset, press the menu / arrows until the desiredpreset is highlighted, then press the menu  arrow to open theparameters menu for the selected preset.MAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSTUNER PRESETSPAGE 1PAGE 2PAGE 3PAGE 4STATIONSETUPTUNER PRESETS0102030405060.00FM0.00FM0.00FM0.00FM0.00FM0.00FM07 0.00FM08 0.00FM09100.00FM0.00FM PRESS MENU TO CLEAR PRESETEDIT STATION NAME      BUTTONS TO EDITUP TO 8 CHARACTERS    BUTTON TO ADVANCEEDIT PRESET 1FREQUENCYBANDLISTEN TO PRESETNAMECLEAR PRESETEach tuner preset page allows up to 10 preset stations.0.00FMLOADEDParameterLISTEN TO PRESETNAME CLEAR PRESET
RV-5 Tuner Presets5-3LISTEN TO PRESETLoads the current preset station. Press the menu  arrow to loadthe station preset. The front panel and on-screen display will display“STATION LOADED.”NAME Edits the station name. The station name can be up to 8 characterslong. The available characters are letters A to Z, numbers 0 to 9,and 10 additional symbols: ., -, +, :, (, ), !, @, # or a blank space.CLEAR PRESETClears the current preset entry. The front-panel and on-screendisplay will display “PRESS MENU  TO CLEAR PRESET.” Press themenu arrow to cancel without clearing the preset.TUNER PRESETS LISTEN TO PRESETPAGE 101TUNER PRESETS NAMEPAGE 101TUNER PRESETS CLEAR PRESETPAGE 101
Tuner Presets Lexicon5-4
6Mode AdjustMode Adjust ...............................................................................6-2Listening Mode Activation...........................................................6-2Listening Mode Descriptions .......................................................6-4Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions........6-39Mode – Parameter Relationships ...............................................6-47
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-2MODE ADJUSTSelecting the MODE ADJUST option opens the MODE ADJUST menu, which isused to select a listening mode for adjustment. When the MODE ADJUST menuopens, the currently activated Main Zone listening mode is highlighted.Selecting a listening mode does not activate that listening modefor the current Main Zone input source. Rather, selecting a listeningmode opens the corresponding listening mode menu, which is used tocustomize the selected listening mode. These adjustments are appliedwhen the listening mode is selected with one of the methods described inthe Listening Mode Activation section that begins below.LISTENING MODE ACTIVATIONListening modes are available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), MIC andanalog input sources. The RV-5 allows listening mode selection for all MainZone sources. In some cases, the RV-5 automatically activates a listening modein response to certain commands. For this reason, it is important to understandthe three methods through which listening mode activation occurs.Note:When headphones are plugged into the RV-5, all listening modes are downmixedto two channels with the following exceptions: HEADPHONE L7, HEADPHONE 5.1,HEADPHONE DTS and HEADPHONE 5.1a. These listening modes are described indetail on page 6-27.Listening mode activation occurs through:• the INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection parameters(page 3-12).• the front-panel or remote control Mode button (page 2-17).• the remote control listening mode family selection buttons (page 2-17).MAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETS* These listening mode names differ depend-ing on the current input source, speaker setup and parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions for more information.SETUPMODE ADJUST5.1a BYPASS2CH BYPASSHEADPHONE HEADPHONE 5.1HEADPHONE HEADPHONE 5.1aMODE ADJUSTFILMTVMUSICMUSIC SURRPLIIx MOV*PLIIx MUS*PLII MOVIEPLII MUSICPRO LOGICCINMUSICNIGHTCLUBCONCERT HHALLCHURCHCATHEDRALPANORAMA2-CH SURROUND2-CHANNELMONO LOGICMONO SURROUNDMONO5.1 FILM5.1 TV5.1 MUSIC5.1 PLIIx MOV*5.1 PLIIx MUS*DIGITAL EX*5.1 2-CHANNEL5.1 MONO LOGIC5.1 MONO SURR5.1 MONOFILM*MUSIC**2-CHAN*5.1a  FILM5.1a  MUSIC5.1a STANDARD5.1a 2-CHANNEL
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-3PREFERRED LISTENING MODE SELECTION The INPUT SETUP menus include four preferred listening modeselection parameters labeled 2-CH, DOLBY D, DTS(-ES), 5.1a andMIC. These parameters are used to select a preferred listening modefor 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), 5.1a and LIVE! input sources.The RV-5 automatically activates the selected listening modewhenever a new input is selected or a new input source is present.MODE  AND  BUTTONSThe front-panel and remote-control Mode arrow buttons can beused to audition listening modes with the current Main Zone inputsource. Pressing these buttons scrolls up () or down () throughlistening modes available for the current Main Zone source.Listening modes are scrolled in the order that appears in the MODEADJUST menu.For example, if a 2-channel input source is present, press the  or arrow buttons to scroll through available 2-channel listeningmodes. The selected listening mode appears in the bottom-leftcorner of the Main Zone two-line status.Dynamic Listening Mode SelectionDynamic listening modes are only available under certain condi-tions. For example, many of the dynamic modes are only availablewhen the RV-5 is configured for seven main output channels andsource material with specific encoding is played. All dynamiclistening modes are available through the remote control or frontpanel Mode button. See “Dynamic Listening Modes” on page 3-13 for a completelisting of dynamic listening modes.LISTENING MODE SELECTION BUTTONSThe remote control listening mode selection buttons can be usedto activate the Logic 7 Film, Dolby, DTS(-ES), Logic 7 Music, orLogic 7 TV listening mode that is appropriate for the Main Zoneinput source. For instance, if the L7 button is pressed while a2-channel source is present, the L7 FILM listening mode isactivated. The table below indicates the listening modes associatedwith each mode family selection button.*  These listening mode names differ depending on the input source, the speaker config-uration and certain parameter settings. For 5.1 systems with only side or rear speak-ers (but not both), pressing the   button loads the DOLBY DIGITAL mode.** The “MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE” message appears in the on-screen andfront-panel displays when no listening mode is available for the Main Zone inputsource that is present.*** For ES source.Button 2-Channel SourcesDolby DigitalSourcesDTS(-ES) Sources5.1aSourcesL7 F L7 FILM 5.1 L7 FILM DTS(-ES) L7 FILM 5.1a L7 FILML7 M L7 MUSIC 5.1 L7 MUSIC DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC 5.1a L7 MUSICL7 TV L7 TV 5.1 L7 TV MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE**N/AL7 MS L7 MUSIC SURROUND5.1 L7 MUSIC DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC N/ADOLBY DOLBY PLIIx MOV DD 5.1 PLIIx MOV* MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE**N/ADTS DTS NEO:6 CIN MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE**DTS(-ES) N/A
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-4LISTENING MODE DESCRIPTIONSEach listening mode description lists the default and possible settings for each listening mode menu parameter. All listening mode menus areshown in the Appendix. Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 6-30.L7 FILMThis listening mode is designed for enhanced playback of 2-channelstereo or matrix-encoded film sources. Logic 7 FILM is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that derivesseven channels from 2-channel input sources. Logic 7 also derivesfull-frequency stereo surround channels that realistically increasethe perceived width, length and sense of envelopment of thelistening space. Logic 7 provides remarkable improvementcompared to other decoders.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.L7 TVThis listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo ormatrix-encoded television broadcast sources.Logic 7 TV is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on theLogic 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for broadcastsources.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsAUTO AZIMUTH ON ON, OFFVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dBRE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFFSOUND STAGE REAR FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFFBASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFREAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30msOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST FILMParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsAUTO AZIMUTH ON ON, OFFVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dBFRONT STEERING FILM OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILMRE-EQUALIZER OFF ON, OFFSOUND STAGE REAR FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFFBASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFREAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30msOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST TV
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-5L7 MUSICThis listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo ormatrix-encoded music sources. Logic 7 MUSIC is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on theLogic 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for musicsources.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.L7 MUSIC SURRThis listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereomusic sources recorded in real spaces and for playback ofrecordings that contain added reverb. It is recommended forclassical music sources, which are often recorded in real spaces withadded reverb to enhance the stereo mix.Logic 7 MUSIC SURR is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that issimilar to the MUSIC SURROUND listening mode in other Lexiconproducts. Logic 7 extracts ambient sounds from the input sourceand sends these sounds to all speakers. Ambient sounds are heardfrom all directions, creating a realistic playback presentation thatsimulates what listeners experience in real spaces.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dBFRONT STEERING MUSIC OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILMSOUND STAGE NEUTRAL FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFFBASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFREAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30msOUTPUT LEVELS            Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM                      Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST MUSICParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dBFRONT STEERING MSURR OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILMSOUND STAGE NEUTRAL FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFFBASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFREAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30msOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST MUSIC SURR
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-6DOLBY PLIIx MOV & DOLBY PLII MOVIEDolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic IIthat enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or7.1-channel (six or seven speakers and a subwoofer) surround soundfrom any native two-channel (stereo) or 5.1-channel source.Dolby PLIIx MOV and Dolby PLII MOVIE modes:• Are designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.• Provide impressive enhancement compared to Dolby Pro Logicdecoding.• Are appropriate for Dolby Surround-encoded film sources.The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rearspeakers are present. Activating the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening modeThe DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening modeand cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channelDolby Surround-encoded film sources. To activate the DOLBY PLIIxMov listening mode, play the 2-channel source input, and select theDOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode using the front-panel or remotecontrol Mode buttons.When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-5 will automat-ically activate the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode if this listeningmode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surround-encoded film source was present.Note:The PLIIx MOV mode does not appear in the list of available listening modesif either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.MODE ADJUST PLIIx MOVIE MODE ADJUST PLII MOVIEORParameterOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-7DOLBY PLIIx MUS & DOLBY PLII MUSICDolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic IIthat enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or7.1-channel (six or seven speakers and a subwoofer) surround soundfrom any native two-channel (stereo) or 5.1-channel source.The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rearspeakers are present. Activating the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening modeThe DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode andcannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel DolbySurround-encoded film sources. To activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUSlistening mode, play the 2-channel source input, and select the DOLBYPLIIx MUS listening mode using the front-panel or remote controlMode buttons.When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-5 will automat-ically activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode if this listeningmode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surround-encoded film source was present.Note:The DOLBY PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listeningmodes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.MODE ADJUST PLIIx MUS MODE ADJUST PLII MUSICORParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsPANORAMA OFF ON, OFFCTR WIDTH 3 MIN, 1 to 6, MAXDIMENSION NEUTRAL FRONT, NEUTRAL, REARSURROUND DLY 10ms 0 to 15msOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-8DOLBY PRO LOGICThe Dolby PRO LOGIC mode is designed for playback of DolbySurround-encoded sources. It decodes four channels from DolbySurround-encoded sources, and uses a mono surround channelwith a high-frequency rolloff above 7kHz.This mode is useful for comparison purposes, particularly with theL7 FILM, Dolby PLIIx MOVIE and DTS Neo:6 CIN listening mode.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 fordetailed descriptions.DTS NEO:6 CIN & DTS NEO:6 MUSICThese modes are designed for playback of matrix-encoded digitalstereo film or music sources. DTS Neo:6 derives six channels whenboth side and rear speakers are present (rear channels will be inparallel). It derives five channels when only side or rear speakers arepresent. These listening modes are dynamic listening modes and cannot beassigned as preferred listening modes. To select either of theselistening modes, use the remote control or front-panel Modebutton. When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-5 willautomatically activate a DTS Neo:6 listening mode if this mode wasactivated the last time a 2-channel source was present.Note:• The RV-5 will not automatically activate a DTS NEO:6 listeningmode unless a 44.1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present.The DTS Neo:6 listening modes are not available with 88.2kHz or96kHz, Dolby Digital or analog sources.• The DTS Neo:6 MUSIC listening mode can be activated with thefront-panel or remote control Mode buttons. The DTS Neo:6 CINlistening mode can also activated with the remote control DTSbutton when a 2-channel input source is present.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.ParameterOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST PRO LOGICParameterOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  CIN  MUSICOR
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-9NIGHTCLUBThe NIGHTCLUB mode is designed for playback of “dry” musicsources that benefit from the addition of room reflections,especially music sources that lack ambience in the recording. TheNIGHTCLUB mode generates early reflections and sends them tothe front, side and rear channels to simulate small, intimatelistening spaces.The NIGHTCLUB mode is a superior room simulation listeningmode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited fromLexicon professional products.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.CONCERT HALLThe CONCERT HALL mode generates early reflections and sendsthem to the front, side and rear channels to simulate large listeningspaces.The CONCERT HALL mode is a superior room simulation listeningmode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited fromLexicon professional products.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsCENTER DEPTH 11 0 to 18SPEECH DETECT ON ON, OFFSIZE 5m 4 to 20mLIVENESS 196ms 30ms to 20.2sPRE-DELAY 5ms OFF, 1 to 100msROLLOFF 9.0kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFEFFECT LVL +3dB –12 to +6dBOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  NIGHTCLUBParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsCENTER DEPTH 12 0 to 18SPEECH DETECT ON ON, OFFSIZE 20m 4 to 20mLIVENESS 1.72s 30ms to 20.2sPRE-DELAY OFF OFF, 1 to 100msROLLOFF 2.4kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFEFFECT LVL –2dB –12 to +6dBOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  CONCERT HALL
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-10CHURCHThe CHURCH mode uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich,smooth, reverberant decay characteristic of small and mediumlistening spaces – such as churches and chambers – with long rever-beration time relative to their sizes.The CHURCH mode is a superior room simulation listening modebecause it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited fromLexicon professional products.* BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the full parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.CATHEDRALThe CATHEDRAL mode is similar to the CHURCH listening mode. Ituses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth, reverberantdecay characteristic of large listening spaces – such as cathedrals –with long reverberation time relative to their size.The CATHEDRAL mode is a superior room simulation listeningmode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited fromLexicon professional products.* BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the full parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsCENTER DEPTH 5 0 to 18SPEECH DETECT ON ON, OFFSIZE* 20m 4 to 30mMID RT* 1.56s 24ms to 24.3sBASS RT* 1.87s 5ms to 48.6sPRE-DELAY 24ms OFF, 1 to 100msROLLOFF 2.4kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFEFFECT LVL –3dB –12 to +6dBOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  CHURCHParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsCENTER DEPTH 12 0 to 18SPEECH DETECT ON ON, OFFSIZE* 30m 4 to 30mMID RT* 3.72s 24ms to 24.3sBASS RT* 4.47s 5ms to 48.6sPRE-DELAY 23ms OFF, 1 to 100msROLLOFF 3.1kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFEFFECT LVL –8dB –12 to +6dBOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  CATHEDRAL
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-11PANORAMAThe PANORAMA mode is designed for playback of stereo andmatrix-encoded sources. PANORAMA uses proprietary Lexiconalgorithms to move the stereo image outward from the frontspeakers, producing a wider stereo field with greater depth.Sound quality depends on proper location of the listening positionand front speakers. When the front speakers are positioned close toeither side of the display device, the effect is produced over a widerarea than when the front speakers are positioned at a large anglefrom the display device.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.PANORAMA CALIBRATIONSelect PANORAMA CALIBRATION to openthe PANORAMA CALIBRATION menu shownto the left, to calibrate the PANORAMAlistening mode. This listening mode must becalibrated to take full advantage of itseffects.For best results, you should center theprimary listening position between the frontleft and right speakers as shown in the Center illustration at the topof the next page. Otherwise, the PANORAMA listening mode will becalibrated with varying results.An external calibration source is required to calibrate thePANORAMA listening mode. You should select a familiar stereosource.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsEFFECT LVL +4dB –12 to +6dBBASS CONTENT STEREO BINAURL, MONO, STEREOLOW FREQ WIDTH +0 –25 to +25dBSURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFREAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30msINPUT BALANCE <|> L< to <|> to >RCALIBRATION Refer to next columnOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  PANORAMAParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsSOURCE LEFT & RIGHT RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFTSPEAKER ANGLE 30deg 10 to 90degLISTENER POS +0 -127 to +127MODE ADJUST  PANORAMA  CALIBRATIONPANORAMA CALIBRATIONSOURCESPEAKER ANGLELISTENER POSNOTE:ENSURE THAT“SPEAKER SETUP” HASBEEN PROPERLYPERFORMEDLEFT & RIGHT30deg+0
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-12To calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode:1. Remove all obstructions between the speakers and the primarylistening position.2. Make sure the distances between the speakers and the primarylistening position are properly measured. To do this, select oneof the following options.•   Select the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu DISTANCES option tohave the RV-5 automatically calibrate speaker distances.•   Measure the distance between the primary listening posi-tion and the front baffle of each speaker. Then, set the cor-responding SPEAKER DISTANCES menu parameters to theclosest available value.3. Sit in the primary listening position. If the primary listeningposition is not centered between the front left and rightspeakers as shown in illustration B (above), set the PANORAMACALIBRATION  LISTENER POS parameter to compensate forthe difference using the remote control   and  arrowbuttons. Each increment within the –127 to +127 parameterrange represents about one-third of an inch. The Left illus-tration shows the left-of-center position. The Right illustrationshows the right- of-center position4. Set the SOURCE parameter to RIGHT.5. Begin playback of the external calibration source.6. When playback of the external calibration source is in progress,set the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter so the sound is not heard inthe right ear.7. To confirm the LISTENER POS and SPEAKER ANGLE parametersettings, set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT & RIGHT. If thePANORAMA listening mode is properly calibrated, the soundshould be perceived to come from all around the primarylistening position. If not, go back to Step 1 and repeat thecalibration procedure.LEFT RIGHTCENTER
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-132-CH SURROUNDThis mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the leftchannel to Front, Side and Rear Left channels and the right channelto Front, Side and Rear Right channels, and sums the Left and Rightfor the center. It is recommended for background music.2-CHANNELThis mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the left andright channels to the Front L/R and Subwoofer channels. It is recom-mended for two-speaker playback with subwoofers and forcomparison purposes with other listening modes.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 fordetailed descriptions.MONO LOGICThis mode, designed for playback of mono sources, uses proprietaryLexicon reverb algorithms to realistically expand mono sources touse all channels. This dramatically increases the perceived widthand sense of envelopment of the listening space.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 fordetailed descriptions.ParameterOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsSUB LEVEL +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dBCUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  2-CH SURROUNDMODE ADJUST  2-CHANNELParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsEFFECT LVL –9dB –12 to +6dBACADEMY FILTER ON ON, OFFSURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  MONO LOGIC
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-14MONO SURROUNDThis mode, designed for playback of mono sources, sends themono source to all channels.MONOThis mode, designed for playback of mono sources, sends monosources to the center channel and subwoofer.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 fordetailed descriptions.5.1 L7 FILMThe 5.1 L7 FILM mode is a proprietary Lexicon listening modedesigned for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded filmsources, and provides remarkable improvement compared to otherdecoders.It derives seven channels from 5.1-channel input sources withenhanced front steering. When both side and rear speakers arepresent, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode also increases the perceivedlength and sense of envelopment of the listening space.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 fordetailed descriptions.ParameterOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsSUB LEVEL +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dBCUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST MONO SURROUNDMODE ADJUST  MONOParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dBRE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFFSOUND STAGE REAR REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFFBASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500HZ to 20kHz, OFFREAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1ms to 30msCOMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFFLFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0dB to +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  5.1      FILM
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-155.1 L7 TVThis proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded broadcast sources. Based on the5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 TV derives seven channels from5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 fordetailed descriptions.5.1 L7 MUSICThis proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded music sources. Based on the 5.1L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 MUSIC derives seven channels from5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 fordetailed descriptions.Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dBFRONT STEERING FILM OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILMRE-EQUALIZER OFF ON, OFFSOUND STAGE REAR REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFFBASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500HZ to 20kHz, OFFREAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1ms to 30msCOMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFFLFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0dB to +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  5.1      TVParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dBFRONT STEERING MUSIC OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILMRE-EQUALIZER OFF ON, OFFSOUND STAGE NEUTRAL REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFFBASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500HZ to 20kHz, OFFREAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1ms to 30msCOMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFFLFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0dB to +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  5.1      MUSIC
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-165.1 PLIIx MOV The 5.1 PLIIx MOV (MOVIE) listening mode is designed to play back7.1 discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital filmsources. The seven main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel,often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range ofup to 120Hz. The 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode is only available when the front, sideand rear speakers are present. Note:The RV-5RV-5 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding innon-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources.Activating the 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening modeThe 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening mode andcannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital filmsources. To activate this listening mode, use the front-panel or remotecontrol Mode buttons.When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-5 willautomatically activate the dynamic 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode ifthis listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digitalsource was present.Note:The 5.1 PLIIx MOV mode will not appear in the list of available listeningmodes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from theconfiguration.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.MODE ADJUST 5.1 PLIIx MOVParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsEX DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFFCOMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFFLFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-175.1 PLIIx MUS The 5.1 PLIIx MUS (MUSIC) listening mode is designed to playback 7.1discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital musicsources. The seven main channels are full–frequency. The .1 channel,often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range ofup to 120Hz. Note:The RV-5 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding innon-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources.Activating the 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening modeThe 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode andcannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digitalsources. To activate this listening mode, use the front-panel or remotecontrol Mode buttons.When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-5 willautomatically activate the dynamic 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode ifthis listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digitalsource was present.Note:The 5.1 PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listeningmodes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.MODE ADJUST 5.1 PLIIx MUSParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsEX DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFFCOMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFFLFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-18DOLBY DIGITAL & DOLBY DIGITAL EX These listening modes are designed to decode and play back 5.1discrete channels from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. The fivemain channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel, often referred toas LFE information, has a limited frequency range of 120Hz.The mode name differs, depending on the encoding present in theinput source, the EX DECODING parameter setting and the speakersetup. The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is recommended for DolbyDigital sources recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EXencoding. This listening mode can also be used with other typesof 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources with mixed results. The tableat the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behaviorof the Dolby Digital EX mode when activated.The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when both theside and rear speakers are present and Dolby Digital Surround EXdecoding is activated. Matrix decoding is then applied to derive asurround back channel from the other surround channels.• Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is activated when the EXDECODING parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby DigitalSurround EX encoding is detected.• Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not activated when theEX DECODING parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with orwithout Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.Note:The RV-5 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources because they do notinclude information in the input signal that identifies Dolby DigitalSurround EX encoding.MODE ADJUST OR DIGITAL EXDIGITALParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsEX DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFFCOMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFFLFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28Input SourceParameter Setting 5.1-Channel Dolby Digital 5.1-Channel Surround EX  (Flagged)5.1-Channel Surround EX  (Non-Flagged)EX DECODING: AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITALEX DECODING: ON DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL EXEX DECODING: OFF DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-195.1 2-CHANNELThis mode, recommended for recording purposes, is designed forconverting 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded input sources into2-channel Logic 7-encoded output signals.The downmixed 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input signals are sent tothe Front L/R speakers and subwoofer.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.5.1 MONO LOGICThis listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encodedmono sources, uses proprietary Lexicon reverb algorithms to realisti-cally expand mono sources to use all channels. This dramaticallyincreases the perceived width and sense of envelopment of thelistening space.Note that:When a 1.0 Dolby Digital source is present, the RV-5 automaticallyactivates the 5.1 MONO LOGIC listening mode.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsCENTER MIX +0dB –25 to +5dBSURROUND MIX +0dB –5 to +5dBCNTR DLY SAMPLES +0 –127 to +127MASTER LEVEL +0dB –5 to +5dBCOMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFFLFE MIX +0.0dB –20.0 to +0.0dBSUB LEVEL +0dB OFF, -30 to +12dBCUSTOM Refer to page 6-285.1 2-CHANNELMODE ADJUSTParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsEFFECT LVL –9dB –12 to +6dBACADEMY FILTER ON ON, OFFSURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-285.1 MONO LOGICMODE ADJUST
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-205.1 MONO SURRThis listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encodedmono sources, sends mono signals to all channels.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.5.1 MONOThis listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encodedmono sources, sends mono signals to the center channel andsubwoofer. See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.ParameterOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-285.1 MONO SURRMODE ADJUSTParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsSUB LEVEL +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dBCUSTOM  Refer to page 6-285.1 MONOMODE ADJUST
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-21DTS-ES DECODINGThe DTS, DTS-ES, and DTS-ES Discr listening modes are designedfor, at a minimum, playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channelmatrix-encoded DTS-ES and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ESsources.The DTS, DTS-ES, and DTS-ES Discr listening mode names differdepending on the encoding present in the input source, theDECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup. DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding isactivated. The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditionsfor the behavior of DTS-ES decoding when it is activated.• DTS-ES decoding is activated when both the side and rearspeakers are present and the ES DECODING parameter is set toON or AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or a6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is detected. • DTS-ES decoding is deactivated when the ES DECODINGparameter is set to OFF or when the ES DECODING parameteris set to AUTO and a 5.1-channel DTS source is detected.• DTS-ES Discr mode decodes 6.1-channel discrete-encodedDTS-ES sources when ES decoding is set to AUTO or ON in theMODE ADJUST menu. The mode appears in the Setup menuwhen a DTS 6.1 source is present and seven speakers areselected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu.Note:The table below is not applicable to the DTS-ES THX, DTS THX ULTRA2and DTS THX MUSIC listening modes. These listening modes will beexplained in greater detail later in this manual.Input SourceParameter Setting 5.1-Channel DTS 5.1-Channel Matrix-Encoded DTS-ES6.1-Channel Discrete-Encoded DTS-ESES DECODING: AUTO DTS DTS-ES DTS-ESES DECODING: ON DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS-ESES DECODING: OFF DTS DTS DTS
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-22DTS-ES L7 FILM & DTS L7 FILMThese proprietary Lexicon listening modes use an advanced matrix todecode seven channels from 5.1- and 6.1-channel film sources withenhanced front steering. When both side and rear speakers arepresent, the DTS-ES L7 FILM listening mode also increases theperceived length and sense of envelopment of the listening space. The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channelDTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES film sources. The listening mode name differs,depending on the encoding present in the input source, the ESDECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.DTS-ES L7 MUSIC & DTS L7 MUSICThese proprietary Lexicon listening modes, similar to the DTS-ESL7 FILM listening mode, use an advanced matrix to decode sevenchannels from 5.1 and 6.1-channel music sources withenhanced front steering to provide remarkable soundimprovement compared to other decoders. The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES music sources. Thelistening mode name differs, depending on the encodingpresent in the input source, the ES DECODING parametersetting and the speaker setups.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.Option/Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dBRE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFFSOUND STAGE REAR REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFFBASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz, OFFREAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30msLFE MIX +0.0dB -10.0 to +0.0dBES DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFFOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28FILMMODE ADJUST FILMOROption/Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dBFRONT STEERING MUSIC OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILMRE-EQUALIZER OFF ON, OFFSOUND STAGE NEUTRAL REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFFBASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz, OFFREAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30msLFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dBES DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFFOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MUSICMODE ADJUST OR MUSIC
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-23DTS, DTS-ES & DTS(-ES) DiscrThis mode decodes 5.1 matrix or 6.1 discrete channels from DTS-ESsources. It is designed for playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channelmatrix-encoded DTS-ES, and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ESsources.The six decoded main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel,often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency rangeof 120Hz.The listening mode name differs, depending on the encodingpresent in the input source, the DECODING parameter setting, andthe speaker setup. Refer to page 6-21 for more information.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.DTS 2-CHAN & DTS-ES 2-CHANThese modes, recommended for recording purposes, senddownmixed 5.1-channel or 6.1-channel DTS-ES input signals to thefront speakers and subwoofer as 2-channel Logic 7-encoded outputsignals.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.Option/Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsLFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dBES DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFFOUTPUT LEVELS  Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST OR DiscrOROption/Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsCENTER MIX +0dB –25 to +5dBSURROUND MIX +0dB –5 to +5dBCNTR DLY SAMPLES +0 –127 to +127MASTER LEVEL +0dB –5 to +5dBLFE MIX +0.0dB –20.0 to +0.0dBES DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFFSUB LEVEL +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dBCUSTOM Refer to page 6-282-CHANMODE ADJUST OR2-CHAN
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-245.1a L7 FILMThe 5.1a LOGIC7 FILM listening mode is a proprietary Lexicon lis-tening mode that uses LOGIC7 decoding to derive seven channelsfrom 5.1-channel analog film sources with enhanced front steering.This listening mode allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bassmanagement, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, andaudio controls (tone controls). See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 fordetailed descriptions.5.1a L7 MUSICThe 5.1a LOGIC7 MUSIC listening mode is similar to the 5.1aLOGIC7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for musicsources. This mode is designed and recommended for playback of5.1-channel analog music sources. See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 fordetailed descriptions.Option/Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dBRE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFFSOUND STAGE REAR REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFFBASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz, OFFREAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30msLFE MIX +0.0dB -10.0 to +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  5.1      FILMOption/Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dBFRONT STEERING MUSIC OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILMRE-EQUALIZER OFF ON, OFFSOUND STAGE NEUTRAL REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFFBASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz, OFFREAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30msLFE MIX +0.0dB -10.0 to +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  5.1a      MUSIC
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-255.1a  STANDARDThis mode allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bassmanagement, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, andaudio controls (tone controls). When these features are not used,the 5.1a STANDARD listening mode is similar to the 5.1a BYPASSlistening mode. The 5.1a STANDARD mode sends identical signals(with appropriate time delays) to the Main Zone audio outputconnectors labeled Side L and Rear as well as Side R and Rear R.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.5.1a  2-CHANNELThis mode downmixes 5.1-channel analog input signals into2-channel LOGIC7-encoded output signals. It sends these signals tothe front speakers and the subwoofer. It is recommended forrecording purposes, particularly for recording from a DVD-A ormulti-channel SACD player to a CD-R or another 2-channel record-ing format.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.ParameterOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-285.1a STANDARDMODE ADJUSTParameter Default Setting Possible SettingsCENTER MIX +0dB -25 to +5dBSURROUND MIX +0dB -5 to +5dBCNTR DLY SAMPLES +0 -127 to +127MASTER LEVEL +0dB -5 to +5dBLFE MIX +0.0dB -20.0 to +0.0dBSUB L/R LVL +0dB OFF, -30 to +12dBCUSTOM Refer to page 6-285.1a 2-CHANNELMODE ADJUST
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-265.1a BYPASS• Designed for playback of 5.1-channel analog sources, such asDVD-A or SACD players.• Sends the 5.1-channel analog audio input connector directly tothe Main Zone volume control and audio output connectors, asshown on pages 2-9 and 3-59. These signals receive no internalprocessing.• When both side and rear speakers are present, surroundchannel signals are sent in parallel to the side and rear speakers.To configure a 5-channel speaker setup, set the OUTPUTLEVELS menu SIDE L/R or REAR L/R parameter to OFF todeactivate the associated surround speakers.• Pressing the remote control HOME/MAIN/AGE2/A BYP then2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASSparameter between ON and OFF.Note:Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances and audio (tone) controlsare not available when the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated.2CH BYPASSThis listening mode sends 2-channel analog audio input signals tothe Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R with nointernal processing.The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is automatically activatedwhenever a 2-channel analog source is present and the MAIN ADVmenu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON. The 2CH BYPASSlistening mode is not available when a digital source is present andthe MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO.Pressing the remote control HOME/MAIN/PAGE2/A BYP button then2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASSparameter between ON and OFF.Note:Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances and audio controls (tone) arenot available when the 2CH BYPASS listening mode is activated.Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsOUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-28CUSTOM Refer to page 6-28MODE ADJUST  5.1a BYPASS MODE ADJUST  2CH BYPASS
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-27HEADPHONE L7HEADPHONE L7 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designedfor enhanced playback of 2-channel sources through headphones.This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing and Head RelatedTransfer Functions to realistically increase the perceived sense ofenvelopment when listening through headphones.The HEADPHONE listening mode is recommended for 2-channelsources when listening through headphones. No parameters for theHEADPHONE listening mode are available.HEADPHONE 5.1HEADPHONE 5.1 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designedfor enhanced playback of Dolby Digital-encoded music or filmsources through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7processing and Head Related Transfer Functions to realisticallyincrease the perceived sense of envelopment when listeningthrough headphones.The HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode is recommended for DolbyDigital-encoded sources when listening through headphones. Noparameters for the HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode are available.HEADPHONE DTSHEADPHONE DTS is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designedfor enhanced playback of DTS(-ES)-encoded music or film sourcesthrough headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processingand Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase theperceived sense of envelopment when listening throughheadphones.The HEADPHONE DTS listening mode is recommended for DTS-encoded sources when listening through headphones. No param-eters for the HEADPHONE DTS listening mode are available.HEADPHONE 5.1aHEADPHONE 5.1a is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designedfor enhanced playback of 5.1-channel analog music or film sourcesthrough headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processingand Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase theperceived sense of envelopment when listening throughheadphones.The HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode is recommended for5.1-channel analog sources when listening through headphones.No parameters for the HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode areavailable.MODE ADJUST  HEADPHONE MODE ADJUST  HEADPHONE 5.1MODE ADJUST  HEADPHONE MODE ADJUST  HEADPHONE 5.1a
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-28OUTPUT LEVELSOpens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which isused to adjust output levels for the MainZone audio output connectors labeledCenter, Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R.The OUTPUT LEVELS option does not appear on listening modemenus when the selected listening mode does not accommodatemultichannel output signals. Instead, an output-specific parameterappears. For example, the MONO listening mode menu includes aSUB LVL parameter.See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for detailed descriptions.CUSTOMOpens the CUSTOM menu, which can be used to compare customand factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and torestore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode.CUSTOM VS PRESETAllows comparison listening between the custom and factory-defaultversions of the selected listening mode. When PRESET is selected, thelistening mode is heard in its factory-default condition, as if all listeningmode menu parameters were set to their factory-default settings.When CUSTOM is selected, the listening mode is heard in its customcondition, including all current listening mode menu parameter settings.The PRESET and CUSTOM versions of the selected listening mode willsound identical when all listening mode menu parameters are set totheir factory-default settings.Note:The CUSTOM VS PRESET option does not affect current listening modemenu parameter settings.To toggle between the custom and factory-default versions ofthe selected listening mode:1. Follow the CUSTOM VS PRESET menu path to open the CUS-TOM VS PRESET drop-down menu.2. When the CUSTOM VS PRESET option drop-down menu isopen, press the remote control  and  arrow buttons totoggle between the PRESET (factory-default) and CUSTOMversions of the selected listening mode.3. When finished, press the  arrow button to close the CUSTOMVS PRESET drop-down menu.Parameter Default Setting Possible SettingsCENTER +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dBSIDE L/R +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dBREAR L/R +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dBSUB +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dBListening ModeMODE ADJUST OUTPUT LEVELSOUTPUT LEVELSCENTERSIDE L/RREAR L/R+0dB+0dB+0dBSUB +0dB(Listening Mode)MODE ADJUST CUSTOM(Listening Mode)MODE ADJUST CUSTOM CUSTOM VS PRESETCUSTOMCUSTOM VS PRESETRESET MODEPRESETCUSTOM
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-29RESET MODERestores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory defaultsettings.To restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode:1. Follow the RESET MODE menu path to select the RESET MODEoption. The PRESS RIGHT V  TO RESTORE MODE messageappears in the on-screen display.2. Press the   arrow button to restore the factory-default version ofthe selected listening mode. Press the  arrow button to close themessage without restoring the factory-default.Note:When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore thefactory-default version of the selected listening mode, the corre-sponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode parameter isautomatically set to OFF.(Listening Mode)MODE ADJUST CUSTOM RESET MODECUSTOMCUSTOM VS PRESETRESET MODEPRESS RIGHT  V  TO RESTORE MODE
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-30LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS5 SPKR ENHANCE ON, OFFSimulates 7-channel playback in 5-channel speaker configurations.When set to ON, the RV-5 provides an increased sense ofspaciousness and envelopment through the surround speakers. Thisenhancement is most noticeable when the surround speakers arepositioned to the side of the primary listening position, or when theprimary listening position is located against the rear wall. The effec-tiveness of this parameter varies within the listening space. For bestresults, it is recommended that you position the surround speakersto the left and right sides of the primary listening position.ACADEMY FILTER ON, OFFWhen set to ON, restores the proper tonal balance of older monofilm sources that have much narrower frequency responses thanmore recent mono film sources.AUTO AZIMUTH ON, OFFMaximizes matrix steering accuracy. When set to ON, the RV-5continually monitors the 2-channel input signal and automaticallyadjusts the relative level and time offset of the input channels toensure that signals are sent to the appropriate channels withmaximum separation. When set to OFF, the accuracy of the selectedlistening mode varies among sources. It is recommended that youset this parameter to ON for film and broadcast sources and to OFFfor music sources.BASS CONTENT BINAURAL, MONO, STEREOAdjusts the bass content of binaural, mono and stereo recordings.When set to BINAURL, the RV-5 activates low-frequency compen-sation. Select this setting for true binaural sources recorded withdummy head microphones. Select the MONO setting for sourcesrecorded with mono bass. Select the STEREO setting for sourcesrecorded with stereo bass.BASS ENHANCE ON, OFFEnhances stereo bass, which results in low-frequency reproductionthat is less localizable and more realistic in the listening space. Theeffectiveness of the BASS ENHANCE parameter varies, dependingon room acoustics and the ability of the surround speakers toreproduce low frequencies. It is recommended that you use front,side or rear speakers that are capable of reproducing frequencies of40Hz or lower.BASS RT 5ms to 48.6sWorks with the MID RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amountof time required for low-frequency information to decay below 60dBin level. The BASS RT parameter setting should match the MID RTparameter setting for more natural effects in smaller listening spaces.CAUTION!Setting the BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameters to a highvalue may produce undesirable or damaging audio.BASS XOVER 30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFFSets the frequency to which BASS RT applies.CALIBRATIONOpens the PANORAMA listening mode CALIBRATION menu, whichis used to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode. Refer to“PANORAMA” on page 6-11 for more information.
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-31LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS (continued)CENTER OFF, –30 to +12dBControls the output level of the audio output connector labeled Center.Available in all except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS,DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL), MONO, 5.1 MONO and LIVE!modes.CENTER DEPTH 0 to 18Adjusts the amount of processing applied to the center channel,changing the perceived distance of the center speaker. Highersettings increase and lower settings decrease the perceived distanceof the center speaker from the listening position. Available inNIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes.CENTER MIX –25 to +5dBIndicates the relative center channel level for downmixing. Set thisparameter to +0dB for film sources and –5dB for music sources.Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.CNTR DLY SAMPLES –127 to +127Controls the relative time offset of the center channel. Set thisparameter to +0 unless the center channel is not properly timedand the value of the error is known. Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL andDTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.COMPRESSION AUTO, ON, OFFReduces wide volume level changes and increases dialogue intelligi-bility at lower listening levels for Dolby Digital input sources. WhenON, full compression is applied, regardless of volume level. When OFF,compression is not applied. Set this parameter to AUTO or ON forDolby Digital input sources that are listened to at lower volume levels,especially for nighttime viewing to avoid disturbing others. Available inall Dolby Digital modes.CTR WIDTH MIN, 1 to 6, MAXAdjusts the center image. When set to MIN, the center image is heardfrom just the center speaker. When set to MAX, the center image isheard as a “phantom” center image from the front left and rightspeakers. When set on the 1 to 6 scale, the center image is heard invarious combinations of the front and center speakers. Available inDolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.CUSTOMOpens the CUSTOM menu, which is used to compare custom andfactory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to restorethe factory default version of the selected listening mode. Available inall modes.CUSTOM VS PRESETAllows comparison listening to the custom and factory-default versionsof the selected listening mode. Refer to page 5-32 for information.Available in all modes.DIMENSION FRONT, NEUTRAL, REARControls the relative balance of the sound field, which can be usefulwith certain recordings to achieve a more suitable balance amongall speakers. When set to FRONT, the sound field is balanced towardthe front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, the soundfield is balanced at the center of the listening space. When set toREAR, the sound field is balanced toward the rear of the listeningspace. Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-32EARLY RFLX LVL –80dB to +12dB, OFFControls the amount of additional early reflections. Available in allLIVE! modes.EFFECT LVL –12 to +6dBAdjusts the amount of effect applied to the listening mode. Availablein NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA,MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC modes.ES DECODING AUTO, ON, OFFControls DTS-ES decoding, which extracts a rear channel from5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES and6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES sources. When ON isselected, DTS-ES decoding is activated for all DTS-ES sources. WhenOFF is selected, DTS-ES decoding is deactivated for all DTS-ES sources. DTS-ES decoding is activated when AUTO is selected and a 5.1-channelmatrix-encoded or a 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source isdetected. DTS-ES decoding is deactivated when a 5.1-channel DTSsource is detected. DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding isengaged. DTS listening modes are available when DTS-ES decodingis not engaged. Refer to the DTS-ES Decoding section that beginson page 5-25 for more information.Note the following:• DTS-ES decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rearspeakers are present.• The DTS-ES STATUS menu includes an SB level meter when theES DECODING parameter is set to ON and a 5.1-channel DTSsource is present or when the ES DECODING parameter is set toAUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channeldiscrete-encoded DTS-ES source is present.This parameter is available in all DTS modes.EX DECODING AUTO, ON, OFFControls Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding, which extracts a rearchannel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources recorded with orwithout Dolby Digital Surround EX. When ON, Dolby DigitalSurround EX decoding is engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digitalsources. When OFF, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is disen-gaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.When AUTO is selected, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding isengaged when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recordedwith Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected. Dolby DigitalSurround EX decoding is not engaged when a non- flagged5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without DolbyDigital Surround EX encoding is detected.Note:The RV-5 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encodingin non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged inputsource does not identify Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in the inputsignal.The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when DolbyDigital Surround EX decoding is engaged. The Dolby DIGITALlistening mode is available when Dolby Digital Surround EXdecoding is not engaged. Refer to the Dolby DIGITAL EX & DolbyDIGITAL listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5-22 formore information.Note the following:• Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unlessboth side and rear speakers are present.
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-33LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS (continued)• This parameter is available in 5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS,DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL modes.• When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing theremote control DOLBY button while a 5.1-channel DolbyDigital source is present activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX orDolby DIGITAL listening mode. Subsequent presses adjust theEX DECODING parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON andOFF settings.FRONT STEERING OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILMAdjusts front steering between the front left, front right, and centerspeakers. When set to FILM, maximum front steering is applied tothe center channel. When set to MUSIC, moderate front steering isapplied. When set to MSURR, minimum front steering is applied.When set to OFF, no front steering is applied. It is recommendedthat you set this parameter to FILM for film and broadcast sourcesand to MUSIC, MSURR or OFF for music sources. Available in L7 TV,L7 MUSIC, L7 MUSIC SURR, all 5.1 L7 modes and all DTS L7 modes.INPUT BALANCE L< to <|> to >RControls the balance of the selected stereo analog audio inputconnectors, compensating for audio input sources with audiblechannel imbalance. Available in PANORAMA mode.LFE MIX –20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dBControls the output level of LFE information – the .1 channel in a 5.1-or 6.1-channel input source – that is sent to the audio output labeledSubwoofer. Low frequencies from up to seven other channels might becombined with the LFE information to create the subwoofer outputsignal, which significantly increases subwoofer output levels. Careful adjustment of this parameter allows achievement of propertonal balance and reduces the risk of subwoofer overload. When thespeaker setup does not include a subwoofer, LFE information is mixedinto speakers for which the corresponding CUSTOM SETUP menuparameter is set to FULL or to the lowest crossover points. Available inall Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO) and all DTS modes.LISTENER POS –127 to +127Compensates for primary listening positions that are not centeredbetween the front left and right speakers. Each increment within the –127 to +127 parameter range represents about one-third of an inch.Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5-13 for moreinformation. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION mode.Note:The LISTENER POS parameter range might extend past the location of thefront left and right speakers. LIVENESS 30ms to 20.2sDepends on the SIZE parameter setting. The LIVENESS parameteradjusts the amount of effect recirculation. Higher settings mimicmore reflective surfaces and increase decay time. Available inNIGHTCLUB and CONCERT HALL modes.LOW FREQ WIDTH –25 to +25dBApplies low-frequency spatial correction to the input signal. Thiscorrection is applied to uncorrelated input signals below 60Hz.Available in PANORAMA mode.
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-34MASTER LEVEL –5 to +5dBAdjusts the output level of 2-channel Logic 7-encoded sources.Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.MID RT 24ms to 24.3sWorks with the SIZE parameters to adjust the amount of timerequired for mid-frequency information to decay below 60dB inlevel. The full parameter range might not be available dependingon the SIZE parameter setting. Available in CHURCH, CATHEDRALand all LIVE! modes.CAUTION!Setting the BASS RT, MID RT or SIZE parameters to a highvalue may produce undesirable or damaging audio.OUTPUT LEVELSOpens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which is used to adjust outputlevels for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Center,Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R. Refer to page 5-32 for moreinformation. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.12-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS andLIVE! modes.PANORAMA ON, OFFWhen set to ON, Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC listeningmodes extend the front stereo image to include surround channelsignals, which creates a “wraparound” effect with side wall imaging.Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.Note:The PANORAMA parameter within the Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIxMUSIC listening modes should not be confused with the separatePANORAMA listening mode (page 6-11).PRE-DELAY 1 to 100ms, OFFAdjusts delay time between the direct sound and the onset of rever-beration. Higher settings make the simulated space sound larger.Because some pre-delay is inherent in all source material, youshould begin with the parameter set to the lowest setting, thenmake adjustments accordingly. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERTHALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.RE-EQUALIZER ON, OFFSimulates high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters.When set to ON, the RV-5 applies a high-frequency filter. When setto OFF, the RV-5 does not apply a high-frequency filter. It is recom-mended that you set this parameter to ON for film sources, as manyfilms are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too brightwhen played back in home theaters without re-equalization.Available in L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX, 5.1L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, DTS (-ES) L7 FILM,DTS(-ES) THX ULTRA2 and DTS(-ES) THX modes.REAR DLY OFFSET OFF, 1 to 30msIncreases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying thearrival time of rear speaker signals. It is recommended that youincrease the setting when using side and rear speakers that arelocated close together or when a greater sense of depth is desired inthe listening space. Available in all Logic 7 modes and PANORAMAmode.
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-35LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS (continued)REAR L/R –30 to +12dB, OFFControls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connectorlabeled Rear L/R. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.12-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS andLIVE! modes.RESET MODERestores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory-default settings. Available in all modes.REVERB LVL –80 to +0dB, OFFControls the amount of added reverb. Available in all LIVE! modes.ROLLOFF 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFSimulates the absorption of high frequencies in a real space. It isrecommended that you begin with a low setting to simulate high-frequency absorptive spaces. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERTHALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.SHAPE 0 TO 4Controls the buildup of the energy that most audibly creates thesound of a real room. SHAPE and SPREAD work together – if either isset to zero, the other has no effect. Available in all LIVE! modes.SIDE L/R –30 to +12dB, OFFControls the level of the Side L/R audio output connectors in the MainZone. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL,5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes.SIZE 4 to 20 or 30mAdjusts the length of the listening space within a 4m to 20m or30m range (depending on the listening mode). Increase the size ofthe space to increase the reverb effect. Available in NIGHTCLUB,CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.CAUTION!Setting the BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameters to a highvalue may produce undesirable or damaging audio.SOUND STAGE FRONT, NEUTRAL, REARDynamically controls the relative balance of the audio outputconnectors. When set to FRONT, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levelsare attenuated by 6dB, shifting the perceived balance of the soundfield to the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, Side L/Rand Rear L/R output levels are slightly attenuated by 3dB, shifting theperceived balance of the sound field to the center of the listeningspace. When set to REAR, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels are notattenuated, preserving the intended balance of the sound field.Available in all Logic 7 modes.
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-36SOURCE RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFTControls the perceived direction of the PANORAMA listening modeexternal calibration source signal. When RIGHT is selected, thesound is perceived to come from the right of the primary listeningposition. When LEFT is selected, the sound is perceived to comefrom the left of the primary listening position. When LEFT & RIGHTis selected, the sound is perceived to come from all around theprimary listening position. Refer to the Calibration section thatbegins on page 6-11 for more information about the SOURCEparameter. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.Note:The SOURCE parameter controls the perceived direction of the sound,although both the front left and right speakers generate the externalcalibration source signal.SPEAKER ANGLE 10 to 90degCompensates for a wide or narrow speaker angle relative to theprimary listening position. Select the setting closest to the anglebetween the front left and right speakers and the primary listeningposition. Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 6-11for more information about the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter.Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.SPEECH DETECT ON, OFFDistinguishes monaural speech from other input sources. When set toON, effects are lowered to minimize interference and unnatural echoin monaural speech. When stereo input sources are present, the frontleft and right channels are independently used as inputs for ambiencesynthesis. When strong monaural speech is present in the input source,the monaural component of the ambience effect is reduced and thestereo component of the effect is increased. When set to OFF, theamount of ambience synthesis is dynamically controlled. Available inNIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes.SPREAD 0 to 100%Controls the timing between the initial reflections that most audiblycreate the sound of a real room. SHAPE and SPREAD work together; ifeither is set to 0, the other has no effect. Available in all LIVE! modes.SUB & SUB LVL OFF, –30 to +12dBControls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connectorlabeled Subwoofer. The SUB parameter appears on the listeningmode OUTPUT LEVELS menu. The SUB LVL parameter appears onlistening mode menus when the listening mode does not accom-modate multichannel output signals. Available in all except LIVE!modes.SURR ROLLOFF 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFApplies high-frequency attenuation control to the audio outputconnectors labeled Side L/R and Rear L/R. This filter is only applied tooutput signals generated by the RV-5. Available in all Logic 7 modes.SURROUND DLY 0 to 15msIncreases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying thearrival time of signals from the side and rear speakers. It is recom-mended that you increase the setting when a greater sense ofdepth is desired in the listening space.SURROUND EX AUTO, ON, OFFControls the THX Surround EX decoding feature, which can be used toextract a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. WhenON is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged for all5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When OFF is selected, THXSurround EX decoding is not engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digitalsources. Available in THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX and THX modes.
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-37LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS (continued)SURROUND MIX -5 to +5dBControls the relative level of surround channel information sent to theaudio output connectors labeled Front L/R. It is recommended thatyou set this parameter to +2dB or +3dB for all input sources. Availablein 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN modes.TREB CUT RT 500Hz to 20kHzSets the frequency above which high frequencies are rolled off inthe reverberated signal, causing reverberated signals to growprogressively darker. This results in a more natural sound because itsimulates the effect of air absorption in a real hall. Setting thisparameter to a low frequency dampens the audio as it re-circulates,and consequently can actually shorten the reverb time. Available inall LIVE! modes.VOCAL ENHANCE +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dBControls the level of dialog-boost in the audio output connectorlabeled Center. Increase this setting to improve dialog intelligibility,particularly at lower volume levels. Available in all Logic 7 modes.
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-38MODE – PARAMETER RELATIONSHIPSThe following table lists each parameter and the modes in which it is used. The parameter... Is used in these modes5 SPKR ENHANCE All L7 modesACADEMY FILTER MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGICAUTO AZIMUTH  L7 FILM and L7 TVBASS CONTENT  PANORAMABASS ENHANCE  All L7 modesBASS RT  CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modesCALIBRATION PANORAMACENTER  All except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 MONO and LIVE! modes)CENTER DEPTH  NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRALCENTER MIX  5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHANCNTR DLY SAMPLES  5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHANCOMPRESSION  All Dolby Digital modesCTR WIDTH  Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSICCUSTOM All modesCUSTOM VS PRESET  All modesDIMENSION  Dolby DPLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSICEARLY RFLX LVL All LIVE! modesEFFECT LVL NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA, MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGICES DECODING  All DTS modes
RV-5 Mode Adjust6-39EX DECODING  5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS, DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITALFRONT STEERING  L7 TV, L7 MUSIC, L7 MUSIC SURR, all 5.1 L7 modes and all DTS L7 modesINPUT BALANCE  PANORAMALFE MIX  All Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1 MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO), all DTS modes and 5.1a BYPASSLISTENER POS  PANORAMA CALIBRATIONLIVENESS  NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALLLOW FREQ WIDTH  PANORAMAMASTER LEVEL  5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHANMID RT  CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modesOUTPUT LEVELS  All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modesPANORAMA  Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSICPRE-DELAY  NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modesRE-EQUALIZER  L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX, 5.1 L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, DTS (-ES) L7 FILM, DTS (-ES) THX ULTRA2 and DTS (-ES) THXREAR DLY OFFSET  All L7 modes and PANORAMAREAR L/R  All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes RESET MODE  All modesREVERB LVL All LIVE! modesROLLOFF  NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modesSHAPE All LIVE! modesSIDE L/R  All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes SIZE  NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modesThe parameter... Is used in these modes
Mode Adjust Lexicon6-40SOUND STAGE  All L7 modesSOURCE PANORAMA CALIBRATIONSPEAKER ANGLE  PANORAMA CALIBRATIONSPEECH DETECT  NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRALSPREAD All LIVE! modesSUB & SUB LVL  All except LIVE! modesSURR ROLLOFF  All L7 modesSURROUND DLY  Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSICSURROUND MIX  5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHANTREB CUT RT All LIVE! modesVOCAL ENHANCE  All L7 modesThe parameter... Is used in these modes
7Troubleshooting and MaintenanceTroubleshooting..........................................................................7-2Routine Maintenance ..................................................................7-4Restoring Factory-Default Settings...............................................7-4
Troubleshooting and Maintenance Lexicon7-2TROUBLESHOOTINGThe RV-5 does not power on.1. Make sure the rear-panel power switch is set to the | (“on”)position.2. Attempt to power on the RV-5 with the front-panel Standbybutton and remote control On button.3. Examine the power cord to ensure a good connection betweenthe rear-panel AC input connector and the wall outlet.4. Check the electrical circuit and breaker.The remote control does not work.1. Eliminate obstructions between the remote control and thefront-panel IR receiver. When the RV-5 is not using the rear-panel IR IN connector, the remote control must be in line ofsight with the front-panel IR receiver for proper operation. Theremote control might also become unreliable if strong sunlightor fluorescent light is shining on the IR receiver.2. Make sure the remote control batteries are correctly insertedwith the proper polarity (page 1-6).3. Replace the remote control batteries. When the batteries arelow on power, the remote control enters a low-voltagecondition that prevents it from operating the RV-8.The RV-5 is powered on, but there is no audio.1. Make sure volume level is audible. Volume level can beincreased with the front-panel volume knob or the remotecontrol VOL  and  buttons.2. Make sure audio has not been muted. The message “MUTEON” or “FULL MUTE ON” will appear in the on-screen andfront-panel displays when audio has been muted. To deactivatemute, press the Mute button or adjust the volume level.3. Check the INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL IN and ANALOG INparameters to ensure the appropriate audio connector is assignedto the selected input.4. Make sure the RV-5 is receiving an audio signal. To do this,follow the instructions that begin on page 2-29 to open theSTATUS menu for the current input source.Dialogue sounds muffled.If the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, make sure acustom – as opposed to a THX – speaker setup is selected. Then,make sure the CUSTOM SETUP menu CENTER parameter is set toNONE (page 3-31).A humming sound is present in the audio.1. If a cable TV connection is present, disconnect the cable fromthe wall outlet. If this eliminates the humming sound, a groundloop isolation device is required. Contact your dealer or thecable provider for assistance.2. Disconnect components one at a time to isolate the problem.Once the problem is identified, make sure the associatedcomponent is properly grounded and connected to the sameelectrical circuit as the RV-5.The RV-5 is powered on, but there is no video.1. Examine the video cables – particularly the S-Video cables – to ensure a good connection to the associated component.
RV-5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance7-32. Check the INPUT SETUP menu VIDEO IN and COMPONENT IN(page 3-11) parameters to ensure the appropriate videoconnector is assigned to the selected input.RF interference is present in the audio or video.1. Make sure the RV-5 is not positioned near unshielded TV or FMantennas, cable TV decoders and other RF-emitting devices.2. Replace unshielded cables with shielded cables wherever possible.The RV-5 is exhibiting erratic behavior.1. Set the rear-panel power switch to the c (“off”) position. Wait10 seconds. Then set the rear-panel power switch to the |(“on”) position. 2. Use the RV-5 configuration tool to download the current RV-5configuration to a personal computer (PC) or document all user-defined settings on the Installation Worksheet that begins onpage D-2. Then, follow the instructions on the next page torestore factory-default settings.If all else fails...1. Document all user-defined settings on the InstallationWorksheet that begins on page D-2. Then, follow the instruc-tions on page 7-4 to restore factory-default settings.2. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer.3. Contact Lexicon customer service at 781-280-0300 orwww.lexicon.com.Note:Visit the knowledgebase at http://www.lexicon.com/kbase foranswers to frequently asked questions and additional trouble-shooting information.The tuner volume suddenly went mute, then after a minute itresumed. This seems to happen occasionally.Under the TUNER SETUP menu, is the AUTO FREQUENCY optionactive? You may be experiencing broadcast station dropouts. Whenthe broadcast signal drops out, the volume is muted and AUTOFREQUENCY activates, scanning for alternate broadcast frequenciesand then verifying that the station ID is an exact match. If thestation ID matches and the alternate frequency is a stronger signal,then the tuner switches to the alternate frequency and turns off thevolume mute. Otherwise, auto frequency scans for anotheralternate frequency and repeats the procedure. If there are a lot ofalternate broadcast frequencies, this process can take a noticeableamount of time. To stop this behavior, simply turn off the Autofrequency option.
Troubleshooting and Maintenance Lexicon7-4ROUTINE MAINTENANCEThe bulleted items below describe routine maintenance that shouldbe performed on a periodic basis.• Clean the RV-5 exterior surface with a soft, lint-free cloth. Donot use alcohol, benzene, acetone-based cleaners or strongcommercial cleaners. Do not use a cloth made with steel woolor metal polish. If the RV-8 is exposed to a dusty environment, alow-pressure blower can be used to remove dust from itsexterior surface.• Replace the remote control batteries as needed. The remotecontrol requires four AAA batteries. When these batteries arelow on power, the remote control enters a low-voltagecondition that prevents it from operating the RV-5. Normaloperation will resume when new batteries are installed.RESTORING FACTORY-DEFAULT SETTINGSWhen factory-default settings are restored, all parameters and user-defined values are restored to their factory-default settings. Beforerestoring factory-default settings, record all user-defined settings inthe Installation Worksheet in the Appendix on page D-2.To restore factory-default settings:1. Record all user-defined settings on the Installation Worksheetthat begins on page D-2. When factory-default settings arerestored, all parameters and user-defined values are restored totheir factory-default settings.2. If the RV-5 is powered on, press the front-panel standby buttonor the remote control Off button to activate standby mode anddeactivate the RV-5. If the RV-5 is in standby mode, proceed tostep 3.3. Press the front-panel standby button or the remote control Onbutton to deactivate standby mode and activate the RV-5.4. Quickly press and hold the front-panel or remote control Mutebutton until the FACTORY SETTINGS menu opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays.5. Press the remote control  and  arrow buttons to highlightthe desired option. Highlight the RESTORE DEFAULTS option torestore factory-default settings. Highlight the EXIT option toclose the FACTORY SETTINGS menu without restoring factory-default settings.6. When the desired option is highlighted, press the remotecontrol  arrow button to select this option.• If the RESTORE DEFAULTS option was selected, theFACTORY SETTINGS message shown in the previous pagewill appear in the on-screen and front-panel displays. Whenthis message appears, press a front-panel or remote controlbutton to restart the RV-5.• If the EXIT option is selected, the FACTORY SETTINGS menuwill close and the two-line status will open in the on-screenand front-panel displays.FACTORY SETTINGSEXITRESTORE DEFAULTSFACTORY SETTINGSHAVE BEEN RESTOREDPRESS ANY KEYTO RESTART
AAppendixSpecifications ............................................................................. A-2Declaration of Conformity.......................................................... A-4Menu Tree ................................................................................. A-5Installation Worksheet .............................................................. A-20
Appendix LexiconA-2SPECIFICATIONSAudio Input & Output ConnectorsAnalog Audio Inputs Eight stereo (RCA) or five stereo and one 5.1-channel or 2 stereo and two 5.1-channel connectorsDigital Audio Inputs •  Four S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) and four S/PDIF optical connectors•  Coaxial and optical input connectors conform to IEC-958, S/PDIF standards•  Accepts 44.1, 48, 88.2 and 96kHz sample rates•  Accepts 16-24-bit PCM audio, Dolby Digital, DTS and DTS-ES discrete data formatsMain Zone Audio OutputsEight unbalanced (RCA) connectors for Front L/R, Center, Sub, Side L/R and Rear L/RZone 2 Audio Outputs •  One unbalanced (RCA, variable output level) stereo con-nector •  One unbalanced (RCA, fixed output level) stereo connector •  One S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) connector and one optical con-nectorHeadphone One stereo (1/4-inch phone) connectorAmplifier Seven channels, two channels assigned to Zone 2 or Zone 3 Main Zone Audio PerformanceA/D Conversion 24-Bit, 96kHz, dual-bit ΔΣ architectureD/A Conversion 24-Bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture*Frequency Response 20Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/–0.1dB, –0.25dB at 40kHz, –0.5dB at 40kHz, reference 1kHz*THD + Noise Below 0.02%, 20Hz to 20kHz, 140W Rms all channels driven*Dynamic Range •  105dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, “A” weighted•  102dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, unweighted*Signal-to-Noise Ratio •  105dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, “A” weighted•  102dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, unweightedInput Sensitivity 200mV Rms (2V Rms for maximum output level) at 0dB input gainInput Impedance 100kΩ in parallel with 150pFPreamp Output Level •  150mV Rms typical, 6V Rms maximum (RCA connectors)•  Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume at +12dBPreamp Output Impedance500Ω in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors) Zone 2 Audio PerformanceA/D Conversion 24-Bit, 44.1 to 96kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture (Zone 2 only)D/A Conversion 24-Bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multibit ΔΣ architectureFrequency Response 10Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/–0.25dB, –0.75dB at 40kHz, reference 1kHzTHD + Noise Below 0.005% at 1kHz, (1V Rms output level)Dynamic Range 101dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidthSignal-to-Noise Ratio 101dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidthInput Sensitivity 200mV Rms (4V Rms for maximum output level) Input Impedance 100kΩ in parallel with 150pFPreamp Output Level •  200mV Rms typical, 4V Rms maximum•  Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume at 0dBPreamp Output Impedance300Ω in parallel with 150pF Video Input & Output ConnectorsVideo Inputs Five composite (RCA), five S-Video and three component video (RCA)Video Outputs Two composite (RCA, one monitor and one Zone 2), two S-Video (one monitor and one Zone 2) and one component (RCA)Composite & S-Video PerformanceCompatibility NTSC, PAL and SECAM Main Zone Audio Performance
RV-5 AppendixA-3Switching ActiveOutput Level 1.0V peak-to-peakImpedance 75ΩInput Return Loss >40dBDifferential Gain <0.5%Differential Phase <0.5°Bandwidth >25MHzK Factor <0.3%Gain ±0.15dBSignal-to-Noise Ratio >65dBFrequency Response 10Hz to 10MHz + 0.1/–0.3dBComponent Video PerformanceCompatibility 3-Channel (Y, Pr, Pb), format-independentSwitching PassiveImpedance 75ΩInsertion Loss <3dBBandwidth >150MHzVideo Converter NTSC, PAL, SECAM, to Y/Pb/PrMicrophone Input ConnectorsInputs 4 3.5mm miniature phone jacksInput Sensitivity 10mV Rms (400mV maximum input level)Input Impedance 20kΩ (accepts balanced or unbalanced input signals)FM Tuner PerformanceTuning Range 64MHz to 108MHzUsable Sensitivity <4uV, 1.6mV typicalSelectivity >87dBmV, 93dBmV typicalComposite & S-Video PerformanceFrequency Response 50Hz to 16kHz, +0.1dB/-1.0dBTHD + Noise <0.4% at 1 kHz (stereo)Signal-to-Noise Ratio 50dB minimum at 60dBmVImage Rejection >50dB, >60dB typicalAM Suppression >45dB, >55dB typicalAM Tuner PerformanceTuning Range 520 to 1720kHzUsable Sensitivity <8uV, 4mV typicalTHD + Noise < 0.56%, 0.20% typical (1kHz, 60dBmV, 30% mod)Wideband AGC >80dBmVPhono Performance (MM)Frequency Response 50Hz to 20kHz, +0.5dB/-0.5dB, rumble filter -4dB at 10HzTHD + Noise < 0.20%, 20Hz to 10kHz, 4.7mV inputSignal-to-Noise Ratio 72dB minimumCompatible Amplifier ConnectorsBanana Plugs Standard 0.75 inch plugsSpade Connectors Size 10-12 gaugeBare Wire Up to 10 gauge bare wireOtherTrigger Outputs One power on/off and one programmable connector on detachable screw terminals (+12 VDC, 0.5 amps each)RS-232 Serial Input/OutputTwo 9-pin D-sub connectorsPower Requirements 120-230 VAC, 50-60Hz, 60W (universal line input), detach-able power cordFM Tuner Performance
Appendix LexiconA-4Specifications are subject to change without notice.Power Requirements 120VAC 60Hz, 5.0W (standby), 1.3kW (maximum) 230VAC 50Hz, _____W (standby), _____kW (maximum) universal line input, detachable power cordRV-5Dimensions & Weight•  Height (with feet): 6.496 inches (165 mm)•  Width: 17.717 inches (450 mm)•  Depth: 15.748 inches (400 mm)•  Weight: 39.7 lbs (18kg)Rack-Mounting •  Optional brackets are available for installation in a standard 19" equipment rack (two rack units required)Environment •  Operating temperature: 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)•  Storage temperature: –20° to 60°C (–4° to 140°F)•  Relative humidity: 95% maximum without condensationRemote Control •  Handheld, backlit infrared remote control unit, preprogrammed and learning•  Requires 4 AAA batteries (alkaline batteries recommended)Other DECLARATION OF CONFORMITYApplication of Council Directive(s):2004/108/EEC and 73/23/EEC as amended by 93/68/EECStandard(s) to Which Conformity is Declared:EN 55013:2001 + A1:2003EN 55020:2002 + A1:2003 + A2:2005EN 61000-3-2:2000 + A2:2005EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2001EN 60065:2002Manufacturer: Harman Specialty Group3 Oak ParkBedford, MA  01730-1413  USAThe equipment identified here conforms to the Direc-tive(s) and Standard(s) specified above.Type of Equipment: Digital ReceiverModel: Lexicon RV-5Date: January 2007Harman Specialty GroupVice President of Engineering3 Oak ParkBedford, MA  01730-1413  USATel: 781-280-0300Fax: 781-280-0490
RV-5 AppendixA-5MAIN MENU: SETUP MENUMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSPOWER ON SETTINGSPOWER ON VOL: DOCK AUTO POWER:LASTOFFINPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1continued on page A-6continued on page A-8DISPLAY SETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPINPUT SETUPSURROUND CONFIGDOLBY CONFIGMUTE LEVELSPOWER ON SETTINGSDISPLAY SETUPDISPLAY TYPE:ASPECT RATIO:CONNECTION:HDMI AUDIO OUT:ON-SCREEN DISPLAYFRONT PANEL DISPLAYSETUPcontinued on page A-13continued on page A-13SETUPCRT4:3HDMI/DVIYESINPUT:NAME: ________DIG AUDIO:ANLG AUDIO:DIG/ANLG AUTO:A/D SAMPLE RATE:DVD 1ONHDMI 2NONEMODE FAMILY:MODE:48kHzSTEREO2-CHANNELINPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 2continued on page A-8DEFAULT SUR:VIDEO IN: V-PROCESS:VIDEO OUT:HDMI LINK:ADVANCED VIDEOONBYPASS- - -A/V SYNC DELAY:TRIGGER 2:HDMI 20 msONZONE 2 OUT: ANALOGUSE LASTDVD 1SURROUND CONFIGLOGIC 7 DEFAULT:DOLBY MULTI-CHANNELDOLBY 2.0DTSPCM 44.1/48kHzPCM 96kHzDOLBY PLii MUDOLBY CONFIGURATIONMODE:CENTER WIDTH:DIMENSION:PANORAMA:NIGHT:30OFFOFFcontinued on page A-13REAR SPKSPEAKER/EQ SETUPREAR AMP:AUTOMATICAUTO EQ ONLYMANUALcontinued on page A-13USE LAST
Appendix LexiconA-6SETUP MENU: SPEAKERSMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUP INPUT SETUPSURROUND CONFIGDOLBY CONFIGMUTE LEVELSPOWER ON SETTINGSSETUPDISPLAY SETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPREAR AMP:AUTOMATICAUTO EQ ONLYMANUALREAR SPKAUTOMATICAutomatic selection ofADJUST EQTILT: +0dBOFFSPEAKER/EQ SETUP x-over, Freq, ChannelAdjust, Delay Adjustand Room EqualizationCONTINUEBACK TO SPEAKER/EQ SETUPMANUALSPEAKERSSPEAKER DISTANCESOUTPUT LEVELSAUTO EQ:ADJUST EQOFF1515151515SPEAKER DISTANCESAUTO SETTINGS:FRONT LEFT:CENTER:FRONT RIGHT:SIDE RIGHT:REAR RIGHT:REAR LEFT:SIDE LEFT:SUBWOOFERS:OFF80Hz80Hz80Hz80Hz80Hz20HzSPEAKERSAUTO SETTINGS:FRONT L/R:CENTER:SIDE L/R:REAR/Z2 L/R:SUB/LFE LPF:SUBWOOFERS:SUB HPF:SUB MODE: LFE ONLY1UNITS: FEETRESTORE DEFAULTS151515OFFOUTPUT LEVELSAUTO SETTINGS:TEST TONE:CENTER:FRONT RIGHT:SIDE RIGHT:REAR RIGHT:REAR LEFT:SIDE LEFT:SUBWOOFER1:INPUT: ALLRESTORE DEFAULTSFRONT LEFT:SUBWOOFER2:AUTO+0dB+0dB+0dB+0dB+0dB+0dB+0dB+0dB+0dBONOFFEZ SET DESIGN SET 1Place mic at earCONTINUE FAR FIELDBACK TO SPEAKER/EQ SETUPONOFFSKIP FAR FIELDlevel near listeningposition, at least3 ft/0.9 m from anyhard surface.Set volume to -25dB
RV-5 AppendixA-7PLEASE WAITSETUP MENU: INPUT SETUPSETUP MENU: DISPLAY SETUPFLESHTONE NR:COMPNT ENHANCE:BRIGHTNESS: CONTRAST:COLOR:TEST PAT:100ADVANCED VIDEO 2INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1INPUT:NAME: ________DIG AUDIO:ANLG AUDIO:DIG/ANLG AUTO:A/D SAMPLE RATE:DVDONHDMI 2NONEMODE FAMILY:MODE:48kHzSTEREO2-CHANNELINPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 2DEFAULT SUR:VIDEO IN: V-PROCESS:USE LASTUSE LASTMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUP INPUT SETUPSURROUND CONFIGDOLBY CONFIGMUTE LEVELSPOWER ON SETTINGSSETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPDISPLAY SETUPDISPLAY SETUPDISPLAY TYPE:ASPECT RATIO:CONNECTION:HDMI AUDIO OUT:ON-SCREEN DISPLAYFRONT PANEL DISPLAYCRT4:3HDMI/DVIYESON-SCREEN DISPLAY SETUP2-LINE OSD:MENU TIME OUT:OFF50sFRONT PANEL DISPLAY SETUPBRIGHTNESS:TIME OUT:FULLOFFON100100OFFONINPUT TYPE:SHARPNESS:NOISE REDUCTION: X-COLOR SUPRESS:DCDi INTERPOL:FILM DETECTION:FILM EDIT DETECT:ONADVANCED VIDEO 132ONONONONVCRMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUPSURROUND CONFIGDOLBY CONFIGMUTE LEVELSPOWER ON SETTINGSSETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPDISPLAY SETUPINPUT SETUPEDIT INPUT NAMEDVD      BUTTONS TO EDITUP TO 8 CHARACTERS    BUTTON TO ADVANCE>INPUT NAMEEDIT INPUT NAMERESTORE DEFAULT NAMEPRESS MENU RESTORE INPUT NAMETO VIDEO OUT:HDMI LINK:ADVANCED VIDEOA/V SYNC DELAY:TRIGGER 2:ZONE-2 OUT:HDMI 2BYPASSOFF100mSOFFDOWNMIX
Appendix LexiconA-8  Selecting an INPUT SETUP menu item opens the cor-responding menu shown below. These menus areidentical regardless of which input is selected. TheMAIN ADV menus shown on the next page indicatefactory-default parameter settings for each input.EDIT INPUT NAMEDVD1      BUTTONS TO EDITUP TO 8 CHARACTERS    BUTTON TO ADVANCE>DVD1 INPUT NAMEEDIT INPUT NAMERESTORE DEFAULT NAMEPRESS MENU    TORESTORE INPUT NAMEDVD1 DIGITAL INCOAX-1COAX-2COAX-3COAX-4DVD1 ANALOG INANALOG-1ANALOG-2ANALOG-3ANALOG-4ANALOG-5ONOFFDVD1 ANLG IN LVLAUTORL AUTO GAINON+0.0dB+0.dBMANUAL-18 to +12dBDVD1 VIDEO INCOMPOSITE-1COMPOSITE-2COMPOSITE-3COMPOSITE-4COMPOSITE-5S-VIDEO-1S-VIDEO-2S-VIDEO-3S-VIDEO-4S-VIDEO-5DVD1 COMPONENTCOMPONENT-1COMPONENT-2COMPONENT-3VIDEODVD1      D MODEFILMTVMUSICDIGITAL5.1 2-CHANNEL5.15.15.15.1 MONO LOGIC5.1 MONO SURR5.1 MONOHEADPHONE 5.1DVD1 MAIN ADVINPUT SELECT ANALOG BYPASS S-VIDEO 16:9 S-VIDEO OSD 4:3COMPONENT OSDDIGITALOFFAUTOONOFFdB0-6-15-30-45OPTICAL-1OPTICAL-2OPTICAL-3OPTICAL-4NONENONEDIGITALANALOGAUTOAUTOOFFONOFFDVD1 2-CH MODEFILMTVMUSICMUSIC SURRPLII MOVIEPLII MUSICPRO LOGICNIGHTCLUBCONCERT HALLCHURCHCATHEDRALPANORAMA2-CH SURROUND2-CHANNELMONO LOGICMONO SURROUNDMONOHEADPHONENONETUNERPHONOANALOG-8ANALOG-6ANALOG-7LIVE!The appearance of the ANALOGIN menu depends on the configu-ration of the analog audio inputconnectors. Refer to page 3-8 formore information.NONEIndicates the current amount ofanalog audio input level adjust-ment for the selected analogaudio input connector. Thisparameter cannot be adjusted.USE LASTUSE LASTDVD1 5.1a MODEMUSICHEADPHONE 5.1a5.1a 5.1aUSE LASTFILM5.1 STANDARD5.1 2-CHANNELLEGACY VIDEO AABDVD1 ZONE2 ADVANLG IN LVLDIGITAL BYPASS DIG OUT RATERECORD+0dBOFF44.1kHzENABLED44.1kHz48kHz-18 to +12dB88.2kHz96kHzBLOCKEDENABLEDONOFFDVD1  MODE  FILM  MUSIC2-CHANHEADPHONE USE LASTINPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1INPUT:NAME: ________DIG AUDIO:ANLG AUDIO:DIG/ANLG AUTO:A/D SAMPLE RATE:DVDONHDMI 2NONEMODE FAMILY:MODE:48kHzSTEREO2-CHANNELMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUPSURROUND CONFIGDOLBY CONFIGMUTE LEVELSPOWER ON SETTINGSSETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPDISPLAY SETUPINPUT SETUPINPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 2DEFAULT SUR:VIDEO IN: V-PROCESS:ZONE-2 OUT:ADVANCED VIDEOONBYPASSA/V SYNC DELAY:TRIGGER 2:HDMI 20 msANALOGUSE LASTUSE LAST
RV-5 AppendixA-9SPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATING(MICROPHONE)OK(MICROPHONE)NOT DETECTED(MICROPHONE)SIGNAL TOO LOW(MICROPHONE)OUT OF RANGE(MICROPHONE)TOO MUCH ROOM NOISECHECK MICROPHONESGROUP MICROPHONESINTO A BUNDLE IN THEMIDDLE OF THE ROOMPRESS     TO BEGIN MIC CHECKCHECK MICROPHONESCHECKING FOR SILENCEPLEASE WAITCHECK MICROPHONESCHECKING MICROPHONESPLEASE WAITAUTO SPEAKER SETUPDISTANCES & LEVELSDISTANCESOUTPUT LEVELSIN PRIMARY LISTENINGPOSITIONSSPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGCHECK MICROPHONESMIC 1MIC 2PRESS     TO VIEWDETAILSPLACE MICROPHONESERROROKorWhen an ERROR message appears on the last CHECKMICROPHONES screen, pressing the   arrow but-ton opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu. When noERROR message appears on the last CHECK MICRO-PHONES screen, pressing the arrow button opensthe AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu.When an ERROR mes-sage appears on the lastCHECK MICROPHONESscreen, press the  or arrow button to highlightthe desired microphone.Then, press the arrowbutton to view moredetails about the error.One of the messagesshown to the left willappear in the on-screendisplay.orororPRESS     TO CONTINUESETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATION
Appendix LexiconA-10SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS (continued)     CUSTOM SETUP40 Hz60 Hz60 Hz60 Hz40 HzOFFN/AAPARTAUTO SPEAKER SETUP!CAUTION!HIGH AUDIO LEVELSYOU WILL HAVE 10 SECTO LEAVE THE ROOM OR SIT QUIETLYPRESS     TO BEGINCOUNTDOWNAUTO LEVELSFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFERERROR+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dBAUTO DISTANCESFOR AUTO CALIBRATIONSPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGMIC CHECK REQUIREDorCUSTOM SETUPAUTO SPEAKER SETUPDISTANCESLEVELSAUTO VALUES APPLIEDPRESS     TO VIEWDETAILSAUTO SPEAKER SETUPDISTANCES & LEVELSDISTANCESOUTPUT LEVELSPLACE MICROPHONESAROUND PREFERREDLISTENING POSITIONSAUTO SPEAKER SETUPTEST WILL BEGIN IN10PRESS    TO SKIPCOUNTDOWNCUSTOM SETUPSETTING DISTANCESFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ftCUSTOM SETUPSETTING LEVELSFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dBCUSTOM SETUPAUTO SPEAKER SETUPDISTANCESLEVELSAUTO VALUES APPLIEDPRESS     TO VIEWDETAILSOKOKERRORERROROKLEVELSOKDISTANCESOK(SPEAKER)SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH(SPEAKER)SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW(SPEAKER)FRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFERERROR0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ftOK(SPEAKER)SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE(SPEAKER)SIGNAL TOO LOW(SPEAKER)MAY NOT BE ACCURATE(SPEAKER)UNABLE TO CALCULATE(SPEAKER)The AUTO DISTANCES and AUTO LEVELS screensshown on the right indicate the individual calibra-tion results for each speaker. Press the   and  arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker cali-bration parameter. Then, press the   arrow but-ton to view more detailed results for the selectedspeaker.Press the   arrow button to return to the AUTOSPEAKER SETUP results screen shown above (right).Then, press the  arrow button to select the othercalibration procedure or press the  arrow buttonto return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.When the RV-8 is finished calibrating speaker dis-tances and output levels, the AUTO SPEAKERSETUP results screen shown at the left will open inthe on-screen display, indicating the results foreach calibration procedure. Press the   or  arrow button to highlight the desired calibrationprocedure. Then, press the   arrow button toselect this procedure. Selecting DISTANCES opensthe AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below.Selecting the LEVELS option opens the AUTO LEV-ELS screen shown below.SETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATION
RV-5 AppendixA-11AUTO SPEAKER SETUPAUTO LEVELSFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFERERROR+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dBAUTO DISTANCESFOR AUTO CALIBRATIONSPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGMIC CHECK REQUIREDDISTANCES & LEVELSDISTANCESOUTPUT LEVELSPLACE MICROPHONESAROUND PREFERREDLISTENING POSITIONSCUSTOM SETUP40 Hz60 Hz60 Hz60 Hz40 HzOFFN/AAPARTAUTO SPEAKER SETUP!CAUTION!HIGH AUDIO LEVELSYOU WILL HAVE 10 SECTO LEAVE THE ROOM OR SIT QUIETLYPRESS     TO BEGINCOUNTDOWNAUTO SPEAKER SETUPTEST WILL BEGIN IN10PRESS    TO SKIPCOUNTDOWNCUSTOM SETUPSETTING DISTANCESFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ftCUSTOM SETUPSETTING LEVELSFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dBSPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH(SPEAKER)SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW(SPEAKER)FRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUB (MONO)ERROR0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ftAPPLIEDAUTO LEVELSSPEAKER OUT OF PHASE(SPEAKER)SIGNAL TOO LOW(SPEAKER)MAY NOT BE ACCURATE(SPEAKER)UNABLE TO CALCULATE(SPEAKER)OK(SPEAKER)The AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below indicatesthe individual calibration results for each speaker. Pressthe   and   arrow buttons to highlight the desiredspeaker calibration parameter. Then, press the arrow button to view more detailed results for theselected speaker.The AUTO LEVELS screen shown below indicates theindividual calibration results for each speaker. Press the  and    arrow buttons to highlight the desiredspeaker calibration parameter. Then, press the arrow button to view more detailed results for theselected speaker.OK(SPEAKER)SET DISTANCESAUTO DISTANCESORIGINAL DISTANCESCR    SR                   RRL                      SL   RLMSUB0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ftSET LEVELSAUTO LEVELSORIGINAL LEVELSCR    SR                   RRL                      SL   RLMSUB0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB0.0dB0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dBAPPLIEDORIGINAL LEVELSAPPLIEDAUTO DISTANCESAPPLIEDORIGINAL DISTANCESSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATION
Appendix LexiconA-12SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS (continued) 75 to 120dBONOFFSPEAKER LEVEL ADJUSTFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFER+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dB+0.0dBMANUAL SPEAKER SETUPSPEAKER DISTANCESLEVELS CALIBRATIONCR    SR                   RRL                      SL   RLMSUB40Hz 60Hz 60Hz60Hz40Hz 40Hz 60Hz 60HzLEVELS CALIBRATIONINTERNAL NOISE TESTEXTERNAL NOISE TESTBASS PEAK LIMITER-18 to 12dBBASS PEAK LIMITERCAL NOISESUB LIMITERLIMIT ADJ!CAUTION!HIGH AUDIO LEVELSONON100dBINTERNAL NOISE!CAUTION!HIGH AUDIO LEVELSCUSTOM SETUPSPEAKER DISTANCESFRONT LEFTCENTERFRONT RIGHTSIDE RIGHTREAR RIGHTREAR LEFTSIDE LEFTSUBWOOFERUNITS0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ft0.0ftFEETMETERS 0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0mSPEAKER SETUPSET CROSSOVERSCHECK MICROPHONESAUTOMATICMANUALSET CROSSOVERSBEFORE CALIBRATINGFEETSETUPINPUTSSPEAKERSI/O CONFIGDISPLAYSVOLUME CONTROLSTRIGGERTUNER SETUPLOCK OPTIONSMAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETSSETUPLIVE! CALIBRATION
RV-5 AppendixA-13SETUP MENU: MUTE LEVELSMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUP INPUT SETUPSURROUND CONFIGDOLBY CONFIGPOWER ON SETTINGSSETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPDISPLAY SETUPMUTE LEVELSMAIN ZONE: -30dBMUTE LEVELSZONE 2: -30dBSETUP MENU: POWER ON SETTINGSMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUP INPUT SETUPSURROUND CONFIGDOLBY CONFIGSETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPDISPLAY SETUPMUTE LEVELSPOWER ON VOL: -30dBPOWER ON SETTINGSDOCK AUTO POWER: OFFPOWER ON SETTINGSSETUP MENU: DOLBY CONFIGMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUP INPUT SETUPSURROUND CONFIGPOWER ON SETTINGSSETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPDISPLAY SETUPMUTE LEVELSMODE:0DOLBY CONFIGCENTER WIDTH:DOLBY PLII MUSETUP MENU: SURROUND CONFIGMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUP INPUT SETUPDOLBY CONFIGPOWER ON SETTINGSSETUPSPEAKER/EQ SETUPDISPLAY SETUPMUTE LEVELSLOGIC 7 DEFAULT: ONSURROUND CONFIGDOLBY MULTI-CHANNELDOLBY CONFIGDIMENSION:PANORAMA:3OFFNIGHT: OFFSURROUND CONFIGDOLBY VIRTUAL: STEREO DOWNMIX: DOLBY MULTI-CHANNELLOGIC 7:ONONONDOLBY 2.0DTSPCM 44.1/48 kHzPCM 96 kHzLOGIC 7: DOLBY PLIIx: PCM 44.1/48 kHzDOLBY PLII:ONONONDOLBY VIRTUAL: HALL: DTS NEO:6:ONONON5/7 CH STEREO:  ONLOGIC 7: DOLBY PLIIx: PCM 96 kHzDOLBY PLII:ONONONDTS NEO:6: ON5/7 CH STEREO:  ONDTS 96/24: DTS-ES MATRIX: DTSDTS + NEO:6:ONONONDTS-ES DISCRETE: STEREO DOWNMIX: LOGIC 7:ONONONDOLBY PLIIx: DOLBY 2.0DOLBY PLII:ONONDOLBY VIRTUAL: LOGIC 7: ONONFACTORY  SETTINGSEXITRESTORE  DEFAULTS FACTORY  SETTINGSHAVE   BEEN  RESTOREDPRESS  ANY KEYTO  RESTARTRefer to the Restoring Factory-Default Settings sectionthat begins on page 7-4 for more information.
Appendix LexiconA-14LB ZOOMMAIN MENU: VIDEO CONTROLSONOFFAUDIO CONTROLSEQ PRESETTONE CONTROLSBASSTREBLEAUDIO STATUS OFF+0.0dB-6.0 to +6.0dB-6.0 to +6.0dBMAIN MENU: AUDIO CONTROLSMAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLS4:3 IN>16:9 DISPLAYVIDEO STATUSORIGINALSETUPVIDEO CONTROLSINPUT RESOL: VIDEO PROCESS: OUTPUT RESOL:COMPONENT OUT:S-VIDEO OUT:COMPOSITE OUT:BYPASSVIDEO STATUSCOPY PROTECTION:AUTOSTRETCH2.35 LB ZOOMSTRETCH 22.35 LB STRETCHOFF- - -480iOFFOFF- - -MAIN MENUAUDIO CONTROLSVIDEO CONTROLSSETUP+0.0dBEQ PRESETPRESET 1:  BYPASSACTIVE PS:  USERPRESET 2:  BYPASSPRESET 3:  BYPASSAUDIO STATUSINPUT: MODE FAMILY:AUDIO: NAME: MODE:CONNECTOR: ORIGINAL
RV-5 AppendixA-15MAIN MENU: MODE ADJUST   MAIN MENUMODE ADJUSTAUDIO CONTROLSTUNER PRESETS* These listening mode names differ depend-ing on the current input source, speaker setup and parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions for more information.SETUPONOFFMODE ADJUST5.1a BYPASS OFF2CH BYPASS OFFHEADPHONE OFFHEADPHONE 5.1 OFFHEADPHONE OFFHEADPHONE 5.1a OFFLIVE! SMALL OFFLIVE! MED OFFLIVE! LARGE OFFMODE ADJUSTFILM OFFTV OFFMUSIC OFFMUSIC SURR OFFPLIIx MOV* OFFPLIIx MUS* OFFPLII MOVIE OFFPLII MUSIC OFFPRO LOGIC OFFCIN OFFMUSIC OFFNIGHTCLUB OFFCONCERT HHALL OFFCHURCH OFFCATHEDRAL OFFPANORAMA OFF2-CH SURROUND OFF2-CHANNEL OFFMONO LOGIC OFFMONO SURROUND OFFMONO OFF5.1 FILM OFF5.1 TV OFF5.1 MUSIC OFF5.1 PLIIx MOV* OFF5.1 PLIIx MUS* OFFDIGITAL EX* OFF5.1 2-CHANNEL OFF5.1 MONO LOGIC OFF5.1 MONO SURR OFF5.1 MONO OFFFILM* OFFMUSIC* OFF*OFF2-CHAN* OFF5.1a  FILM OFF5.1a  MUSIC OFF5.1a STANDARD OFF5.1a 2-CHANNEL OFF     FILMAUTO AZIMUTHVOCAL ENHANCERE-EQUALIZERON+0.0dBONREARSOUND STAGE5 SPKR ENHANCEBASS ENHANCESURR ROLLOFFREAR DLY OFFSETOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOMONOFF7.0kHz15ms     TVAUTO AZIMUTHVOCAL ENHANCEFRONT STEERINGON+0.0dBFILMOFFRE-EQUALIZERSOUND STAGE5 SPKR ENHANCEBASS ENHANCESURR ROLLOFFREAR DLY OFFSETOUTPUT LEVELSREARONOFF7.0kHz15msCUSTOM     MUSICVOCAL ENHANCEFRONT STEERINGSOUND STAGE+0.0dBMUSICNEUTRALON5 SPKR ENHANCEBASS ENHANCESURR ROLLOFFREAR DLY OFFSETOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOMOFF7.0kHz15ms     MUSIC SURRVOCAL ENHANCESOUND STAGE BASS ENHANCESURR ROLLOFFREAR DLY OFFSETOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM5 SPKR ENHANCE+0.0dBNEUTRALONFRONT STEERING MSURROFF7.0kHz15msOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM      PLIIx MOVPANORAMADIMENSIONOFFCTR WIDTH      PLIIx MUSSURROUND DLYOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM 3NEUTRAL10msOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM PRO LOGICOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM                 MUSICNIGHTCLUBCENTER DEPTHSIZE PRE-DELAYROLLOFFEFFECT LVLOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOMLIVENESS115m196msSPEECH DETECT ON5ms9.0kHz+3dBCONCERT HALLCENTER DEPTHSIZE PRE-DELAYROLLOFFEFFECT LVLOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOMLIVENESS1220m1.72msSPEECH DETECT ONOFF2.4kHz-2dBOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM CINCHURCHCENTER DEPTHSIZE PRE-DELAYROLLOFFEFFECT LVLOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOMMID RT520m1.56sSPEECH DETECT ON1.87s24ms2.4kHz-3dBBASS RTCATHEDRALCENTER DEPTHSIZE BASS RTPRE-DELAYROLLOFFEFFECT LVLOUTPUT LEVELSMID RT1230m3.72sSPEECH DETECT ON4.47s23ms3.1kHzCUSTOM-8dBPANORAMAEFFECT LVLLOW FREQ WIDTH REAR DLY OFFSETINPUT BALANCECALIBRATIONOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOMSURR ROLLOFF+4dB+03.1kHzBASS CONTENT STEREO15ms<l>PLII MOVIEOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOMPLII MUSICPANORAMA OFFCTR WIDTH 3DIMENSION NEUTRALSURROUND DLY 10msOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOMOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM2-CH SURROUNDSUB LEVELCUSTOM2-CHANNEL+0dBOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOMMONO SURROUNDEFFECT LVLACADMY FILTERMONO LOGICSURR ROLLOFFOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM-9dBON3.1kHzSUB LVL CUSTOMMONO+0dB
Appendix LexiconA-16     2-CHANCENTER MIXCNTR DLY SAMPLES LFE MIXMASTER LEVEL+0dB+0SURROUND MIX +0dBSUB L/R LVLCUSTOM+0dB+0.0dB+0dBAUTO     DECODING5.1a  FILMVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dBRE-EQUALIZER ONSOUND STAGE NEUTRAL5 SPKR ENHANCE ONBASS ENHANCE OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHzREAR DLY OFFSET 15msLFE MIX +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM5.1a  MUSICVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dBFRONT STEERING MUSICRE-EQUALIZER ONSOUND STAGE NEUTRAL5 SPKR ENHANCE ONBASS ENHANCE OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHzREAR DLY OFFSET 15msLFE MIX +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOMCUSTOMOUTPUT LEVELS5.1a STANDARD     DECODING OUTPUT LEVELS LFE MIXCUSTOM+0.0dBAUTOLIVE! SMALLMID RT 597msBASS RT 597msROLLOFF 3.1kHzTREB CUT RT 3.1kHzPRE DELAY 10msADVANCEDCUSTOM5.1 PLIIx MOVEX DECODING AUTOCOMPRESSION OFFLFE MIX +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM5.1 PLIIx MUSEX DECODING AUTOCOMPRESSION OFFLFE MIX +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOMLIVE! SMALL ADVANCEDREVERB LVL +0dBEARLY RFLX LVL -13dBBASS XOVER 156HzSHAPE 0SPREAD 0%SIZE 19mLIVE! MED ADVANCEDREVERB LVL -4dBEARLY RFLX LVL -14dBBASS XOVER 156HzSHAPE 2SPREAD 25%SIZE 30mLIVE! LARGE ADVANCEDREVERB LVL -6dBEARLY RFLX LVL -17dBBASS XOVER 156HzSHAPE 2SPREAD 28%SIZE 38mLIVE! MEDMID RT 1.84sBASS RT 2.76sROLLOFF 2.4kHzTREB CUT RT 3.1kHzPRE DELAY 18msADVANCEDCUSTOMLIVE! LARGEMID RT 4.71sBASS RT 4.71sROLLOFF 3.1kHzTREB CUT RT 2.4kHzPRE DELAY 20msADVANCEDCUSTOM5.1  FILMVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dBRE-EQUALIZER ONSOUND STAGE REAR5 SPKR ENHANCE ONBASS ENHANCE OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHzREAR DLY OFFSET 15msCOMPRESSION OFFLFE MIX +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM5.1  TVVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dBFRONT STEERING FILMRE-EQUALIZER OFFSOUND STAGE REAR5 SPKR ENHANCE ONBASS ENHANCE OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHzREAR DLY OFFSET 15msCOMPRESSION OFFLFE MIX +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM5.1  MUSICVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dBFRONT STEERING MUSICRE-EQUALIZER OFFSOUND STAGE NEUTRAL5 SPKR ENHANCE ONBASS ENHANCE OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHzREAR DLY OFFSET 15msCOMPRESSION OFFLFE MIX +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM FILMVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dBRE-EQUALIZER ONSOUND STAGE REAR5 SPKR ENHANCE ONBASS ENHANCE OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHzREAR DLY OFFSET 15msLFE MIX +0.0dB DECODING AUTOOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM MUSICVOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dBFRONT STEERING MUSICRE-EQUALIZER OFFSOUND STAGE NEUTRAL5 SPKR ENHANCE ONBASS ENHANCE OFFSURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHzREAR DLY OFFSET 15msLFE MIX +0.0dB DECODING AUTOOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM DIGITAL EXEX DECODING  AUTOCOMPRESSION OFFLFE MIX +0.0dBOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM5.1 2-CHANNELCENTER MIX  +0dBSURROUND MIX +0dBCNTR DLY SAMPLES +0MASTER LEVEL +0dBCOMPRESSION OFFLFE MIX +0.0dBSUB LEVEL +0dBCUSTOM5.1 MONO LOGICEFFECT LVL  +-9dBACADEMY FI8LTER +ONSURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHzOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM5.1 MONO SURROUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM5.1 MONO SUB LEVEL +0dBCUSTOM5.1a 2-CHANNELCENTER MIX  +0dBSURROUND MIX +0dBCNTR DLY SAMPLES +0MASTER LEVEL+0dBLFE LFE MIX +0.0dBSUB LEVEL +0dBCUSTOMCUSTOMOUTPUT LEVELS5.1a BYPASSNO PARAMETERS2CH BYPASSHEADPHONES  NO PARAMETERSHEADPHONES 5.1NO PARAMETERSHEADPHONES  NO PARAMETERSHEADPHONES 5.1aNO PARAMETERS
RV-5 AppendixA-17MODE ADJUST (continued)Selecting the listening mode menu CALIBRATION, OUTPUT LEVELS or CUSTOM option opens the corresponding menu path shown below. The CALIBRATION option is available forthe PANORAMA listening mode. The OUTPUT LEVELS and CUSTOM options are available for most listening modes. These menus are identical regardless of which listening mode isselected. Listening mode menu parameter drop-down menus are shown below and on the next page. Selecting a listening mode menu parameter opens the corresponding parameter drop-down menu shown below and on the next page. These drop-down menus are identicalregardless of which listening mode is selected. However, certain parameter ranges differ from listening mode to listening mode. PANORAMA CALIBRATIONSOURCESPEAKER ANGLELISTENER POSNOTE:ENSURE THAT“SPEAKER SETUP” HASBEEN PROPERLYPERFORMEDLEFT & RIGHT30deg+0PANORAMAEFFECT LVL +4dBSTEREO+03.1kHz15ms<I>BASS CONTENTLOW FREQ WIDTHSURR ROLLOFFREAR DLY OFFSETINPUT BALANCEOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOMMONO LOGICEFFECT LVL -9dBON3.1kHz3.1kHzACADMY FILTERSURR ROLLOFFCUSTOMOUTPUT LEVELSCENTER +0dB+0dB+0dB+0dBSIDE L/RREAR L/RSUB MONO LOGICEFFECT LVL -9dBON+03.1kHzACADMY FILTERSURR ROLLOFFOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOMCUSTOM VS PRESETRESET MODECALIBRATIONOUTPUT LEVELSCUSTOM-25 to +5dB0 to 18CENTER MIXCENTER DEPTHOFF, -30 to +12dBCENTER 5 SPKR ENHANCEACADEMY FILTERAUTO AZIMUTHONOFFONOFFONOFF5ms to 48.6sBASS RTBASS CONTENTBASS ENHANCEONOFFBINAURLMONOSTEREO-127 to +127CTR WIDTHCNTR DLY SAMPLESCOMPRESSIONAUTOONOFFMIN,1 to 6, MAXDIMENSIONCUSTOM VS PRESETPRESETCUSTOMFRONTNEUTRALREAR-12 to +6dBEFFECT LVL FRONT STEERINGEX DECODINGAUTOONOFF     DECODINGAUTOONOFFOFFMSURRMUSICFILM
Appendix LexiconA-18  OFF, 1 to 100msPRE-DELAYOFF, 1 to 30ms10 to 90deg-20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB OFF, -30 to 12dB4 to 20 or 30ms30ms to 20.2s-25 to +25-5 to +5dB24ms to 24.3s500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFREAR L/RSIZECENTER MIXSPEAKER ANGLE VOCAL ENHANCELFE MIXINPUT BALANCE+6.0dB+3.0dB+0.0dBSOURCERIGHTLEFT & RIGHTLEFTSOUND STAGEFRONTNEUTRALREARROLLOFFREAR DLY OFFSETPANORAMAONOFFRE-EQUALIZERONOFFMID RTMASTER LEVELLOW FREQ WIDTHLIVENESSL<          <l>          >R+5 to +5dBSURROUND MIX OFF, -30 to 12dBSIDE L/R-127       +0       +127RESET MODEPRESS RIGHTTO RESTORE MODESURROUND EXAUTOONOFF0 to 15msSURROUND DLY500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFFSURR ROLLOFFOFF, -30 to 12dBSUB LEVELOFF, -30 to 12dBSUB L/R LVLSPEECH DETECTONOFF
RV-5 AppendixA-19MAIN MENU: RESTORE DEFAULTS2CH STATUSINPUTMODEINPUT TYPESAMPLE RATEdB0-6-15-30-45RL     D STATUSINPUTMODECHANNELSBIT RATEdB0-6-15-30-45RLEX ENCODINGPG1CSLSR LFE            STATUSINPUTMODECHANNELSBIT RATEdB0-6-15-30-45RL       ENCODINGPG1CSLSR LFE            STATUSWORD LENGTHSAMPLE RATEPG2 5.1a  BYPASS STATUSINPUTMODEINPUT TYPE2CH BYPASS STATUSINPUTMODEINPUT TYPEDIGITAL STATUSINPUTMODEINPUT TYPESAMPLE RATED STATUS              PG2SAMPLE RATE2.0 ENCODINGDIALOG OFFSETMIX ROOMCENTER MIX LVLSURR MIX LVLFACTORY  SETTINGSEXITRESTORE  DEFAULTSFACTORY  SETTINGSHAVE   BEEN  RESTOREDPRESS  ANY KEYTO  RESTARTRefer to the Restoring Factory-Default Settings section that begins on page 7-4 for more information.5.1a STATUSINPUTMODEINPUT TYPERefer to the Status Menus section that begins on page 2-29 for more information.dB0-6-15-30-45RL2CH STATUSINPUTMODEINPUT TYPESAMPLE RATESAMPLE RATEANLG96kHzSTATUS MENUS
Appendix LexiconA-20INSTALLATION WORKSHEETINPUT SETUP DVD1 DVD2 LD TV SAT VCR CD PVR GAME TAPE TUNER AUXNAMEDIGITAL INANALOG INANLG IN LVLVIDEO INCOMPONENT IN2-CHDMICMAIN ADVANCED   INPUT SELECT   2-CH ANLG BYP   S-VIDEO 16:9   S-VIDEO 4:3 OSD   COMPONENT OSDZONE2 IN
INSTALLATION WORKSHEET (continued)     SPEAKER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES LEVELS CALIBRATIONFRONT LEFT/RIGHTCENTERSIDE LEFT/RIGHTREAR LEFT/RIGHTSUBWOOFERBGCASAUNITSBASS PEAK LIMITERS   CAL NOISE   SUB LIMITER LIMIT ADJREAR PANEL CONFIG VOLUME CONTROL SETUP LOCK OPTIONSCircle one. MAIN PWR ON MODES  8 STEREO INPUTS           5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLGMUTE LEVEL AUDIO CNTRLZONE PWR ON SETUPMAX VOLUME
Appendix LexiconA-22 DISPLAY SETUP TRIGGER SETUPON-SCREEN DISPLAY Circle all parameters set to ON.   STATUS REMOTE ONLYDVD1DVD2SATVCRTVCDCDTUNERAUXZONE2 INPUTSFILMTVMUSICMUSIC SURRPLIIx MOVPLIIx MUSPLII MOVIEPLII MUSICPRO LOGICCINMUSICNIGHTCLUBCONCERT HALLCHURCHCATHEDRALPANORAMA2-CH SURROUND2-CHANNELMONO LOGICMONO SURROUNDMONO 5.1 FILM5.1 TV5.1 MUSIC5.1 PLIIx MOV5.1 PLIIx MUSDIGITAL EX5.1 2-CHANNEL5.1 MONO LOGIC5.1 MONO SURR5.1 MONOFILMMUSIC2-CHAN5.1a BYPASS2CH BYPASS   POSITION   FORMAT   BACKGROUND   REMOTE STATEFRONT-PANEL DISPLAY   STATUS   BRIGHTNESSA/V SYNC DELAYCUSTOM NAMEEDIT CUSTOM NAMEAUDIO CONTROLSBASSTREBLETILT EQLOUDNESSBALANCEFADERZONE2 BALANCE
ty Group offers the following warranty:uration of this Warranty?will remain in effect for three (3) yearsal date of purchase.ed?may be enforced by the original pur-bsequent owners during the warrantyd the original dated sales receipt orwarranty coverage is presented at timered?overs all defects in material andon this product, except as specifiedowing are not covered:sulting from:t, misuse, abuse, or neglect.to follow instructions contained in the de.or attempted repair unauthorized by  Specialty Group.to perform recommended periodic nance.er than product defects, including lackmpetence, or experience on the part ofccurring during any shipment of thislaims for shipping damages must bethe carrier.4. Damage to a unit that has been altered, or onwhich the serial number has been defaced, modi-fied, or removed.What Expenses will Harman Specialty GroupAssume?Harman Specialty Group will pay all labor and materialexpenses for covered items. Payment of shippingcharges is discussed in the next section of the warranty.How is Service Obtained?When this product needs service, write, telephone, orfax Harman Specialty Group to request informationabout where the unit should be taken or sent. Whenmaking a written request, please include your name,complete address, and daytime telephone number;the product model and serial numbers; and a descrip-tion of the problem. Do not return the unit to HarmanSpecialty Group without prior authorization.When Shipping a Product for Service . . .1. Pay any initial shipping charges, which are theresponsibility of the owner. If necessary repairs arecovered by this warranty, Harman SpecialtyGroup will pay return shipping charges to anydestination in the United States using the carrierof our choice.2. Pack the unit securely.  Package insurance isstrongly recommended.3. Include a copy of the original dated sales receipt.(A copy of the original dated sales receipt must bepresented whenever warranty service is required.)4. Do not include accessories such as power cords oruser guides unless instructed to do so.What are the Limitations of ImpliedWarranties?Any implied warranties, including warranties of mer-chantability and fitness for a particular purpose, arelimited in duration to the length of this warranty.What Certain Damages are Excluded?Harman Specialty Group’s liability for a defectiveproduct is limited to repair or replacement of thatproduct, at our option. Harman Specialty Group shallnot be liable for damages based on inconvenience;loss of use of the product; loss of time; interruptedoperation; commercial loss; or any other damages,whether incidental, consequential, or otherwise.How do State Laws Relate to this Warranty?Some states do not allow limitations on the duration ofimplied warranties and/or the exclusion or limitationof incidental or consequential damages. As such, theabove limitations may not apply. This warranty is not enforceable outside of NorthAmerica. This warranty provides specific legal rights.Additional rights may be provided by some states.PRODUCTPlease regipurchase. Tor register sales receip           Mr.     Mrs.     Single     MarriedFirst Name Last NameCompany TitleMailing AddressCitySTelephone NumberFEmail AddressProduct Model Purchase DateVersion Serial NumberWhere did you purchase this product?Age EducationUnder 18 High Schoo18-24 College25-34 Graduate S35-49 Certificate:50-6465+How did you learn about this product? CFriend Store salesColleague Store displaTeacher Received aWhich of the following were most importSound QualityFeatures BrandnameWhat are your three favorite magazines?1. 2.What are your three favorite websites?1. 2.What features would you like to see addRV-5  12/06LIMITED WARRANTYHarman Specialty Group3 Oak ParkBedford, MA  01730-1413 USACustomer ServiceTel 781-280-0300Fax 781-280-0495 (Sales)Fax   781-280-0499 (Service)Tel 781-280-0300Fax   781-280-0490www.lexicon.com
A Harman International CompanyPart No. 070-18144  |  Rev 0 |  12/06Product Shipments900 Middlesex Bldg. #6Billerica, MA 01821-0017

Navigation menu